2022 RENEGADE
OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................8
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ......
...........................................................................14
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......
..................................................62
4STARTING AND OPERATING .
.
.
.
.
.
..........................................................................................80
5MULTIMEDIA ......
.........................................................................................................................133
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................221
7IN CA
SE OF EMERGENCY .
.
.
.
.
.
..............................................................................................268
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......
................................................................................286
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......
.......................................................................................341
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .
.
.
.
.
.
...............................................................................................346
11INDEX..............................................................................................................................................351
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................9
ROLLOVER WARNING .............................................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 10
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 14
Key Fob .............................................................14
SENTRY KEY ......
..................................................... 16
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ......
.................... 18
How To Use Remote Start................................18
To Exit Remote Start Mode......
........................19
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped.
.......................................................19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped .
......................................................19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper
De–Icer Activation — If Equipped .
...................20
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped.
.......................................................20
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..... 2
0
To Arm The System .........................................20
To Disarm The System .
.
.
.
.
.
..............................21
DOORS.....................................................................21
Manua
l Door Locks ..........................................21
Power Door Locks ......
.....................................22
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) .
....................................................22
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature —
If Equipped.
.......................................................24
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped.
.
.
.
.
.
...............25
Child Locks ......
................................................25
STEERING WHEEL ......
............................................26
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................26
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ......
.....26
SEATS .
....................................................................26
M
a
n
u
a
l Front Seats..........................................27
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment......
..................27
Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped .
.
.
.
.
.
..29
Heated Seats — If Equipped .
.
.
.
.
.
.....................30
Unfolding The Rear Armrest
40/20/40.
........................................................31
Head Restraints .
.
.
.
.
.
.........................................31
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ......
..................33
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................33
Basic Voice Commands .
.
.
.
.
.
.............................33
Get Started ......
.................................................33
Additional Information .
.
.
.
.
.
...............................33
MIRRORS................................................................ 34
Insid
e Rearview Mirror.....................................34
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ......
34
Outside Mirrors .
.
.
.
.
.
..........................................35
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ......
...................36
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.
.
.
.
.
.
............................................ 36
Headlight Switch .............................................36
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .
.....................................................37
High Beams ......
...............................................37
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .
.....................................................37
Flash-To-Pass .
.
.
.
.
.
.............................................37
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......
........38
Parking Lights......
.............................................38
Headlight Time Delay .
.
.
.
.
.
................................38
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ......
.................38
Turn Signals.
.
.
.
.
.
................................................39
Lane Change Assist......
....................................39
Courtesy Lights.
.
.
.
.
.
...........................................39
INTERIOR LIGHTS ......
........................................... 39
Front Map/Reading Lights ..............................39
Dimmer Controls ......
.......................................40
Rear Lights .
.
.
.
.
.
.................................................40
Dome Light Timing ......
.....................................41
3
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ............. 41
Windshield Wiper Operation............................42
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ......
.........42
Rear Window Wiper/Washer .
.
.
.
.
.
.....................43
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped......
...43
CLIMATE CONTROLS .
.
.
.
.
.
...................................... 44
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions ..........................................................44
Automa
tic Temperature Control (ATC) ......
.....47
Climate Voice Commands......
..........................47
Operating Tips .
.
.
.
.
.
...........................................47
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT......
......... 48
Storage..............................................................48
USB/AUX Control ......
........................................50
Power Outlets ......
.............................................50
Power Inverter — If Equipped.
.
.
.
.
.
.....................51
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped.
.
.
.
.
.
........................52
Ashtray — If Equipped ......
................................52
WINDOWS............................................................... 52
Power
Window Controls ...................................52
Automatic Window Features ......
.....................53
Reset Auto-Up......
.............................................53
Window Lockout Switch.
.
.
.
.
.
.............................54
Wind Buffeting ......
...........................................54
DUAL PANE PANORAMIC POWER SUNROOF
WITH POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED ......
.......... 54
Opening And Closing The Sunroof...................55
Venting Sunroof.
.
.
.
.
.
..........................................55
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade....55
P
inch Protect Feature .
.
.
.
.
.
................................55
Sunroof Maintenance ......
................................56
HOOD ......................................................................56
To Ope
n The Hood............................................56
To Close The Hood ......
.....................................57
LIFTGATE .
................................................................57
U
n
l
oc
k
/Open The Liftgate................................57
Lock/Close The Liftgate.
.
.
.
.
.
.............................58
Cargo Area Features ......
..................................58
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .
.
.
.
.
.
........61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .........................................62
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................64
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ......
.................64
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls.............................................................64
Oil C
hange Reset......
........................................65
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .
.
.
.
.
.
..66
TRIP COMPUTER ......
..............................................69
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES..............................................................69
Red Warning Lights..........................................70
Yellow Warning Lights......
................................72
Yellow Indicator Lights.
.
.
.
.
.
...............................75
Green Indicator Lights .
.
.
.
.
.
...............................76
White Indicator Lights ......
................................77
Blue Indicator Lights ......
..................................77
Gray Indicator Lights.
.
.
.
.
.
..................................77
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) ......
... 77
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity......
................................78
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ......
...................................................... 78
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE......................................... 80
Tip Start Feature .............................................80
If Engine Fails To Start ......
..............................80
Cold Weather Operation ......
............................81
Extended Park Starting.
.
.
.
.
.
..............................81
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine ......
.81
Stopping The Engine.
.
.
.
.
.
..................................81
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped ......
82
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .
.
.
.
.
.
.... 82
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)............................. 82
Auto Park Brake ...............................................84
SafeHold .
..........................................................84
B
r
a
k
e
Service Mode......
...................................84
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .
.
.
.
.
.
........ 85
Gear Selector....................................................86
Gear Ranges......
...............................................87
Transmission Limp Home Mode .
.
.
.
.
.
...............90
Ignition Park Interlock
(Keyless Vehicle) .
.............................................90
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .
.............................................................90
4
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE.............................................. 90
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) ..................................91
SELEC-TERRAIN ......
............................................... 92
Mode Selection Guide......................................92
ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTERS — IF EQUIPPED......
.. 93
POWER STEERING................................................. 93
STOP/START SYSTEM........................................... 93
Autostop Mode .................................................93
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop.
...........................................................94
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode .
................................................................94
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System .
.............................................................95
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System .
.............................................................95
System Malfunction ......
...................................95
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED.
.
.
.
.
9
5
Cruise Control ..................................................95
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .
.
.
.
.
.
...................97
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......
..............................105
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 105
ParkSense Warning Display......
.................... 105
ParkSense Display .
.
.
.
.
.
.................................. 105
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense......
........ 108
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System .. 108
Cl
eaning The ParkSense System .
.
.
.
.
.
........... 108
ParkSense System Usage Precautions......
.. 108
Side Distance Warning (SDW) System.
.
.
.
.
.
... 109
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ......
.................................................. 111
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System......
....................... 112
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation.
................................... 113
Exiting The Parking Space ......
...................... 115
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .
.
.
.
.
.
....................... 117
LaneSense Operation ................................... 117
Turning LaneSense On Or Off......
................. 117
LaneSense Warning Message.
.
.
.
.
.
................ 117
Changing LaneSense Status ......
.................. 121
REAR BACK UP CAMERA .
.
.
.
.
.
............................. 121
REFUELING THE VEHICLE .................................. 122
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................. 123
Certification Label ......................................... 123
TRAILER TOWING......
.......................................... 124
Common Towing Definitions......................... 124
Trailer Hitch Classification......
...................... 125
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .
............................................ 126
Trailer And Tongue Weight......
...................... 126
Towing Requirements .
.
.
.
.
.
............................ 126
Towing Tips ......
.............................................. 128
RECREATIONAL TOWING .
.
.
.
.
.
............................. 129
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................... 129
Recre
ational Towing.
.
.
.
.
.
................................ 129
DRIVING TIPS ......
.................................................130
On-Road Driving Tips..................................... 130
Off-Road Driving Tips ......
.............................. 130
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................133
CYBERSECURITY .................................................133
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................133
Customer Programmable Features ............ 134
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION......
..........................147
System Overview .......................................... 147
Drag & Drop Menu Bar .
.
.
.
.
.
........................... 149
Safety And General Information......
............. 149
UCONNECT MODES ......
.......................................150
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................... 150
Radio Mode ......
............................................ 151
Media Mode .
.
.
.
.
.
........................................... 162
Phone Mode ......
........................................... 164
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED......
...................................................174
Android Auto™ .............................................. 174
Apple CarPlay® .
.
.
.
.
.
....................................... 176
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks .
..................................................... 178
5
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED
(UCONNECT 4C NAV ONLY) ...............................180
Operating Navigation ................................... 180
Where To? .
.
.
.
.
.
............................................... 180
View Map ...................................................... 191
Inform
ation .
.
.
.
.
.
............................................. 199
Emergency ......
.............................................. 200
Map Updates .
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................... 200
SiriusXM® Travel Link ......
............................ 201
SiriusXM® Traffic Plus ......
........................... 201
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED ......
..................................................202
Is My Vehicle Connected?............................. 202
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services .
........................................................ 202
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services .
........................................................ 203
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .
.
.
.
.
.
.................... 205
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account .. 215
CO
NNECTED SERVICES FAQS .
.
.
.
.
.
.....................215
Connected Services SOS FAQs —
If Equipped ......
.............................................. 215
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Unlock FAQs .
................................................. 215
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs .
............................................................. 216
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
If Equipped .
................................................... 216
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ... 216
C
onnected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs — If Equipped .
.................. 217
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs .
............................................................. 217
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights
FAQs .
.............................................................. 217
Connected Services Account
FAQs — If Equipped .
...................................... 218
Data Collection & Privacy ......
....................... 220
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .
.
.
.
.
2
20
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 220
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 221
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 221
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .
.
.
.
.
.
. 222
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ......
................... 228
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped......
............................................... 228
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation — If Equipped .
............ 232
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 23
5
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .
.
.
.
.
.
............. 240
Occupant Restraint Systems........................ 240
Important Safety Precautions .
.
.
.
.
.
................ 240
Seat Belt Systems ......
................................... 241
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ......
246
Child Restraints .
.
.
.
.
.
...................................... 255
SAFETY TIPS......
...................................................265
Transporting Passengers.............................. 265
Transporting Pets......
.................................... 265
Connected Vehicles .
.
.
.
.
.
................................ 265
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .
......................................................... 265
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .
..................................... 267
Exhaust Gas ......
............................................ 267
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......
................... 267
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................268
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......268
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................271
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 271
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ......
....... 272
Jacking Instructions ......
................................ 273
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED.
.
.
.
.
.
...............276
Tire Service Kit Storage ................................ 276
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation.
...................................................... 276
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions......
........ 277
Replacing The Sealant.
.
.
.
.
.
............................ 278
JUMP STARTING ......
............................................278
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 278
Jump Starting Procedure......
........................ 279
6
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ..280
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS............................281
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............................281
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................282
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .........................283
Front–Wheel Drive (FWD) ............................. 284
Four–Wheel Drive (4WD) ......
........................ 284
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .
.
.
.
.
.
.... 284
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..................................................................285
EVENT
DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................285
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................286
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 287
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ......
..............................293
1.3L Turbo Engine......................................... 293
Checking Oil Level ......
................................... 294
Adding Washer Fluid .
.
.
.
.
.
............................... 294
Maintenance-Free Battery ......
..................... 294
Pressure Washing .
.
.
.
.
.
................................... 295
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ......
..............................295
Engine Oil ...................................................... 295
Engine Oil Filter .
.
.
.
.
.
....................................... 296
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ......
........................ 296
Air Conditioner Maintenance.
.
.
.
.
.
.................. 296
Body Lubrication ......
..................................... 297
Windshield Wiper Blades ......
....................... 297
Exhaust System ......
...................................... 298
Cooling System.
.
.
.
.
.
........................................ 299
Brake System ......
.......................................... 302
Automatic Transmission .
.
.
.
.
.
........................ 303
Fuses.............................................................. 303
Bulb
Replacement.
.
.
.
.
.
................................... 311
TIRES..................................................................... 322
Tire
Safety Information ................................. 322
Tires — General Information .
.
.
.
.
.
.................. 329
Tire Types....................................................... 332
Spare
Tires — If Equipped.
.
.
.
.
.
....................... 333
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......
................... 334
Snow Traction Devices .
.
.
.
.
.
........................... 335
Tire Rotation Recommendations ......
.......... 336
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ......
............. 337
Treadwear...................................................... 337
Traction Grades.
.
.
.
.
.
....................................... 337
Temperature Grades......
............................... 337
STORING THE VEHICLE.
.
.
.
.
.
................................. 338
BODYWORK ......................................................... 338
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 338
Body And Underbody Maintenance.
.
.
.
.
.
........ 338
Preserving The Bodywork ......
....................... 338
INTERIORS ......
.....................................................339
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 339
Plastic And Coated Parts ......
........................ 339
Leather Surfaces.
.
.
.
.
.
..................................... 340
Glass Surfaces ......
....................................... 340
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........341
BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................341
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..341
Torque Specifications ................................... 341
FUEL REQUIREMENTS.
.
.
.
.
.
...................................342
1.3L Turbo Engine......................................... 342
Reformulated Gasoline......
........................... 342
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .
.
.
.
.
.
.................. 342
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ......
... 343
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.
.
.
.
.
.
343
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline .
.................... 343
Materials Added To Fuel......
......................... 343
Fuel System Cautions ......
............................. 344
FLUID CAPACITIES.
.
.
.
.
.
.........................................344
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ..................345
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................345
7
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................346
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 346
Prepare A List .
.
.
.
.
.
.......................................... 346
Be Reasonable With Requests......
............... 346
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 346
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 346
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center......
......... 346
Mexico.
........................................................... 346
P
u
e
r
t
o Rico And US Virgin Islands......
.......... 347
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).
........................ 347
Service Contract .
.
.
.
.
.
..................................... 347
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................347
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................348
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................348
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......
..................................... 348
In Canada .
..................................................... 348
P
U
B
L
I
CATION ORDER FORMS ......
....................348
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................349
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
d
ifferently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision
Ú page 130.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicl
e. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text.
Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
9
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles
can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions
that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of
severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use
of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedu
res that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
op
erati
on, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Fol
low this reference for additional information on
a part
icular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertai
ning to the topic.
1
10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol
Ú page 69.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
curren
t vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 70
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 70
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 70
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 71
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 71
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 71
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 71
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 71
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 71
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 71
Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light
Ú page 72
Red Warning Lights
11
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 72
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 72
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 72
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 72
Audio System Failure Light
Ú page 72
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 72
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Red Warning Lights
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
Ú page 72
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 73
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 73
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 73
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 73
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 73
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 74
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 74
Yellow Warning Lights
1
12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 74
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
Ú page 75
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 75
4WD Over Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 75
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 75
4WD Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 75
Dusk Sensor Malfunction Indicator Light
Ú page 75
Yellow Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 75
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 76
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light
Ú page 76
Fuel Cutoff Failure Light
Ú page 76
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Yellow Indicator Lights
13
Hazard Warning Lights
Ú page 76
Parking/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 76
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 76
White Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Idle Coasting
Ú page 77
Green Indicator Lights
Light Sensor Failure
Ú page 77
Speed Warning Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 77
Gray Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator Light
Ú page 77
White Indicator Lights
1
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote
Start (if equipped), and Panic button operation.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate from distances up to approximately
66
ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The
key fob also contains an emergency key, which is
stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob
is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the pu
sh of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
which will display directions to follow
Ú page 349.
To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock
button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash
and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 133.
1 — Unlock
2 — Emergency Key
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — PANIC
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Left Vehicle Feature — If Equipped
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Fob
Has Left Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument
cluster display along with an interior chime. An
exterior audible and visual alert will also be
activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in
order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
the key fob inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the
key fob and pulling the emergency key out
with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
blade
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
2
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace
the battery. When replacing the battery, match
the (+) sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the back
cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your
fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio
-
ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
r
ubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authori
zed dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
igniti
on and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
incorrect key fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position
, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek i
mmediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close s
ecurely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ Ignition, always remember to place the
ignition in the OFF position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have b
een programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
conside
red an invalid key
Ú page 349.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition with the push of a button as long as the key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has three
operati
ng modes: OFF, ON, and RUN.
NOTE:
The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located
inside
the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
followi
ng positions:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
No electrical devices are available.
ON
The vehicle is not running.
Some electrical devices (central locking, alarm,
etc.) are still available.
RUN
Driving mode.
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.).
NOTE:
If the ignition state/mode does not change with the
push of
a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition.
Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
systems. Use of these systems may result in
vehicle starting problems and loss of security
protection.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
2
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For information on normal starting, see
Ú page 80.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicl
e while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
328
ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
w
eather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the driver enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce
this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15
minute cycle. Pushing
the Re
mote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeat
ed for a third cycle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi
-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other c
ontrols, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intru-
sion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition
button while pressing the brake pedal prior to the
end of the 15
minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
t
he Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15
minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
in the
ON/RUN position, the climate controls will
resume previously set operations (temperature,
blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
The message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.4°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15
minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambien
t temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if selected in the comfort menu
screen within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 133. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depend
ing on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls will be automatically adjusted
t
o the optimal temperature and mode settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position where the climate controls will
resume their previous settings.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks
or other controls could cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
2
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.4°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.4°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level Mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control
settings, see
Ú page 44.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote
Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position. The climate control settings will
change if manually adjusted by the driver while the
vehicle is in Remote Start mode, and exit auto
-
matic override. This includes the OFF button on the
climat
e controls, which will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start Is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue
Ú page 349.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
p
l
a
c
e
d
in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches
for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If
something triggers the system, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system is factory adjusted
to standards from different countries.
The Vehicle Security system is a complementary
security system developed to hinder the occur
-
rence of vehicle theft and prevent vandalism. It
does not prevent the theft of your vehicle; the
system is a deterrent.
The Vehicle Security system does not monitor
glass breakage or the movement of objects or
people inside the vehicle. The alarm does not
intervene in the case of vehicle tilt variations
when it is parked.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 22.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 22.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your ve
hicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
batter
y becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of
long inactivity of the vehicle), lock the doors by
turning the emergency key in the exterior door lock
cylinder.
NOTE:
If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the event
of a fa
ilure to the system, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position to turn the alarm off.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked from inside
the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward until the lock indicator is shown.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock
button until the lock indicator is hidden. To unlock
the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the
lock indicator is hidden. If the door lock button is
locked (lock indicator visible) when you shut the
door, the door will remain locked. Therefore, make
sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
All doors and the liftgate can be programmed to
unlock
on the use of one of the front door interior
handles within the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 133.
Manual Door Lock
NOTE:
The manual lock knob unlocks each individual
door sep
arately.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
2
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each
front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
the doors, liftgate and fuel door.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with
the Ke
yless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry system if
equipped
Ú page 22.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 133.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the Passive Entry system
from locking and unlocking the vehicle.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and, if equipped, will arm the
Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side Or Passenger’s
Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of either front door handle, grab the door
handle
to unlock the door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Always make sure the ignition is in the OFF
position, remove the key fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal
injuries or death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
d
angerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi
-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other c
ontrols, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 133.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK
-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-
Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle and it does not detect any
Passive Entry key fobs outside the vehicle, then the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passiv
e Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry
door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within
5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, push
the Pa
ssive Entry lock button located on the
outside door handle to lock the vehicle doors and
liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door han
dle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle
without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into th
e electronic liftgate release handle. With a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5
ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release handle
to open.
Liftgate Release/Passive Entry
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m)
of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock
button
located to the right of the electronic liftgate
release handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock the
liftga
te and the doors. The liftgate unlock feature is
built into the electronic liftgate release.
Emergency Unlocking Driver Door
If the key fob battery is low or depleted, the
e
mergency key can be used to unlock the driver
side door lock cylinder.
To release the emergency key, proceed as follows:
1. S
lide the emergency key release button to the
side.
2. Remove the emergency key from the key fob.
NOTE:
The emergency key can be inserted into the door
lock cy
linder from either direction Ú page 349.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK ON EXIT FEATURE —
I
F EQUIPPED
If Auto Unlock is enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 133, this feature will unlock all the doors
when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
a
nd in PARK.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
2 — Passive Entry Lock Button
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
d
angerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be severely injured or killed. Chil
-
dren should be warned not to touch the
p
arkin
g brake, brake pedal, or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil
-
dren, and do not leave the ignition in the ON or
R
UN position. A child could start the vehicle,
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause them to be severely injured or
killed
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
DEAD LOCK DEVICE — IF EQUIPPED
The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that
prevents the use of the internal door handles of
the vehicle and the power door lock switch.
This device prevents the doors from opening within
the pa
ssenger compartment.
Arming The Dead Lock Device
The device works on all doors and requires two
pushes of the lock button on the key fob. For
vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, the device
will also work by pushing the lock button on the
driver’s or passenger’s side exterior door
handle.
The arming of the device is indicated by three
flashes of the turn signals.
The device does not operate if one or more
doors are not properly closed.
Disarming The Device
The device will automatically disarm by pushing
the unlock button on the key fob. For vehicles
equipped with Passive Entry, the device will also
disarm by using the driver or passenger Passive
Entry door handle to unlock and open the door.
Placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
CHILD LOCKS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the
system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if
the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi
-
tion.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
rotate the lock/unlock knob to the unlocked
position, roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be
opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
2
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/
telescoping lever downward (toward the floor). To
tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/
telescoping lever upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold we
ather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel switch has been turned
on, it will stay on for an average of 80
minutes or
more before automatically shutting off. This time
will vary based on environmental temperatures.
The heated steering wheel can shut off early or
may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm. The heated steering wheel control button is
located in your vehicle’s touchscreen or on the
instrument panel.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system
, see Ú page 19.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate
-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overh
eat.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri
-
ously injured or killed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
MANUAL FRONT SEATS
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the
adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats,
near the floor.
Manual Seat Adjustment Levers
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
you have reached the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered
by using a lever, located on the outboard side of
the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat
height or push downward on the lever to lower the
seat height.
Manual Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release
the lever.
MANUAL REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
WARNING!
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever (If Equipped)
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
2
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Split Rear Seats
The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat which
increases the storage of the rear cargo area.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be
necessary to position the front seat to its
mid-track position. Be sure that the front seats
are fully upright and positioned forward, this will
allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
Prior to folding the rear seat, you must secure
the rear armrest in the upright position.
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply unfolding the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
Cargo Area Enlargement
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides
additional storage in the rear cargo area.
Proceed as follows:
1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
2. Move
the seat belts to the outboard side of the
seat.
3
. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both
sides of the rear seatbacks completely
forward.
Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area
allows you to carry a single passenger on the right
side of the rear seat, while the enlargement of the
right side allows you to carry two passengers.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped)
Ú
page
58.
2. F
ully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the seat belts to the outboard side of the
seat
and rest them on the seat belt guide.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left
or right rear seatback completely forward.
Rear Seat Release
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatba
ck from fully locking, you will have difficulty
returning the seat to its proper position.
1. Move the seat belts to the seat belt guides on
the to
p edge of the seat to ensure the
seatbacks properly latch.
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until
they
lock on both the latches. Verify the red
notches are no longer visible on the release
lever. If the red notches are visible, the
seatback is not secure.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
l
ikely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
1 — Seat Belt Guide
2 — Seatback Release Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Power Seat Switch
Some models may be equipped with a power
driver's seat and/or power passenger seat. The
power seat switch and power seat recliner switch
are located on the outboard side of the seat near
the floor. Use the power seat switch to adjust seat
height, angle, or forward/rearward position. Use
the power seat recline switch to adjust the angle of
the seatback.
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearwa
rd. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
d
own. P
ull upward or push downward on the seat
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up
or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
front of the seat switch and the front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Reclining The Seatback
The seatback can be reclined both forward and
rearward. Push the seat recliner switch forward or
rearward. The seatback will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
2
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar Adjustment— If Equipped
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
Power Lumbar Switch
NOTE:
Power seat adjustments are only allowed when the
igniti
on is in the ON position, and for about
30
minutes after it is placed in the OFF position.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The heated seat buttons are located in
your vehicle’s touchscreen or on the
instru
ment panel.
You can choose between two heating levels:
Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to
turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn
the heating elements off.
If the operator presses the heated seat button a
second time to turn on the LO setting, the display
will change from HI to LO, and the LO level setting
will turn off automatically after 45
minutes.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
a
utomatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 145
minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level
setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 60
minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate
.
The timing values may vary the heated seat
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system
, see
Ú page 19.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over
-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
i
ncreased surface temperature of the seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
UNFOLDING THE REAR ARMREST
40/20/40
Pull the rear armrest tab to release it from the seat
and pull forward.
Armrest Tab Location
Fold Center Armrest Forward
The center part of the rear seat can also be used
a
s a rear armrest with cupholders.
Rear Armrest With Cupholders
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
2
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualif
ied technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
Rear Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard head
restraints and one center head restraint for its rear
passengers. The rear head restraints can be raised
or lowered. When the center seat is being
occupied, the head restraint should be in the
raised position. When there are no occupants in
the center seat, the head restraint can be lowered
for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head r
estraint.
To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualif
ied technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 4C NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
Apps m
enu of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recogni
tion system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc
Ú page 349.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-
855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call and
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, Navigation And Climate Functions
2
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window. Headlight
glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by
moving the lever under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the lever under the mirror
is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Mirror Adjustment
NOTE:
The mirror will automatically release in the event of
heavy
contact with a passenger.
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pushing the button at the base
of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will
illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is
activated. The sensor to the right of the button
does not illuminate.
Dimming Mirror
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle’s trans-
mission has been placed in REVERSE.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the mirror cover.
Lift Cover For Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped
To extend the sun visor, proceed as follows:
1. P
lace the sun visor against the door glass by
d
e
t
a
c
hing it from the hook and turning it
toward the side window.
2. Slide the visor along the rod to provide
covera
ge more to the rear.
Sliding Sun Visor
3. Slide out the sun visor extender for even more
side
coverage toward the rear.
Using The Extender
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
Power Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s
door panel.
To adjust the mirror, rotate the mirror selection
switch to the left or to the right and then push the
mirror adjustment switch in the four directions
indicated by arrows.
NOTE:
To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN position.
The power mirror switches will remain active for
up to three minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to
the neutral position to avoid accidental move-
ments.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
3 — Power Folding Mirror Switch
2
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
To adjust the exterior mirrors, push the corners of
the mirrors until the desired alignment is obtained.
Manual Adjustment Mirror
Folding Mirror
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror
to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage.
The mirror has three detent positions: full forward,
normal and full rearward.
Folding Exterior Mirror
Power Folding/Unfolding Mirrors — If Equipped
Push the mirror fold/unfold switch briefly to fold or
unfold the exterior mirrors.
To fold or unfold the exterior mirrors, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The fold/unfold mirrors switch will remain active
for up
to three minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature can be activated
whenev
er you turn on the Rear Window
Defroster
Ú page 44.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. The headlight switch
controls the operation of the headlights, side
marker and parking lights, daytime running lights,
fog lights and the dimming of the instrument
cluster and interior lighting.
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Lighting Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Front Fog Light Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the
instrument cluster and the controls located on the
instrument panel.
NOTE:
On vehicles sold in Canada, both the rear position
lights
and Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn
on when the headlight switch is rotated to the O
(off) position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs), if enabled
through Uconnect Settings, will turn on when the
instrument cluster is on and remain on unless the
headlights are turned on or the instrument cluster
is switched off.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH BEAMS
To activate the high beam headlights, push the
multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle), and an indicator will illuminate in the
instrument cluster display.
To deactivate the high beam headlights, pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of
the vehicle).
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
NOTE:
The headlights must be on for the high beams to
activa
te.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automatically controlling the high beams
through the use of a camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high
beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle
is out of view.
NOTE:
The multifunction lever must be in the high
beam position in order to activate the Automatic
High Beams.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off using the Uconnect
system
Ú page 133.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc
-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
c
ause the system to function improperly.
When set to AUTO, the system automatically turns
the headlights on or off based on ambient light
levels.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
2
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to
the last detent (AUTO position) for automatic
headlight operation. To turn the automatic system
off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START
position
before the headlights will come on in the
automatic mode.
Dusk Sensor
There is an infrared LED sensor that works with the
rain sensor, located on the windshield. It detects
changes in light intensity outside the vehicle,
based on the sensitivity of light set by using the
menu on the display or on the Uconnect system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of
extern
al light required for controlling the lighting.
To turn the dusk sensor on, rotate the headlight
switch to the AUTO position. To turn it off, rotate the
headlight switch to a position other than AUTO.
NOTE:
The dusk sensor can only be activated with the
igniti
on in the ON/RUN position.
PARKING LIGHTS
Rotate the headlight switch to the first detent to
turn on the parking lights. The parking light
indicator in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving
your vehicle in an unlit area.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable
betwee
n 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds within
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 133.
Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
t
he OFF position while the headlights are still on.
The delay interval begins when the headlight
switch is turned off from the low beam position.
If the headlight switch is in AUTO and the
headlights were on before the ignition was turned
off, the delay interval begins automatically.
Headlight Delay Deactivation
The feature is disabled by turning on the
h
eadlights, the parking lights or by placing the
ignition in the RUN position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is
turned
on, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within two minutes of
placin
g the ignition in the OFF position to activate
this feature.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights
or the low beam headlights and push the fog
light button on the headlight switch. The front fog
lights feature is latching, which means that every
time that the button is pressed and the fog lights
are activated, the vehicle memorizes the request
and reactivates the front fog lights every time that
the parking lights or low beams are active. To
deactivate the feature, push the front fog button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
again. The front fog lights are deactivated each
time the parking or low beam lights are
deactivated or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam head-
lights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam
h
eadli
ghts will turn off the fog lights.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve
visibi
lity at night while turning the vehicle. When
activated, a light incorporated in the front fog light
will illuminate on the side of the vehicle the
steering wheel is rotated or the turn signal
indicator is on. It can be activated through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 133.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster display flash to show
proper operation.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash five times then automatically turn
off.
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights feature allows you to activate
the low beam, parking lights, and sidemarker lights
for 25 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked
(through the key fob or the Passive Entry door
handles [if equipped]). The courtesy lights feature
can be activated or deactivated through the
Uconnect Settings. When a door is open with the
feature active, the activation of the lights is
extended for five seconds. The feature is disabled
when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
FRONT MAP/READING LIGHTS
The courtesy lights are mounted between the sun
visors above the rearview mirror. The light switches
are used to turn the lights on or off.
Driver’s Courtesy Lights
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the
d
river
or passenger light switch.
1— Left Switch
2— Right Switch
2
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the
battery from discharging once the doors are
closed.
If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned
off after approximately 15 minutes after the
igniti
on is in the OFF position.
DIMMER CONTROLS
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the brightness
of the ambient light located in the overhead
console, door handle lights, lower instrument
panel lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin
lights.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
instrument panel dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the brightness
of the instrument panel. The instrument panel
dimmer has two positions at the top of the thumb
wheel. The first top detent position puts the interior
lighting into daytime mode and the very top detent
position illuminates all the interior lights. The
bottom detent position of the instrument panel
dimmer dims the internal backlights to their lowest
dimmable setting and disables the interior lights.
Dimmer Controls
REAR LIGHTS
On vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there are two
interior lights located above the grab handles of
the rear doors. When the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position, the lights come on when any door is
opened.
Push the button on the light once to turn the light
on manu
ally, and push the button a second time to
turn the light off.
Rear Light Button (If Equipped With Sunroof)
On vehicles not equipped with a sunroof, a single
dome li
ght is located in the center of the roof.
Rear Dome Light Buttons (Sunroof Not Equipped)
1 - Ambient Light Dimmer Control Switch
2 - Instrument Panel Dimmer Control Switch
1 — Dome Defeat Button
2 — Dome On Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
To operate the rear dome light, proceed as follows:
Push the switch to the on/right position from its
center position and the lights are always on.
Push the switch to the off/left position from its
center position and the lights are always off.
Leave the switch in the center position, and the
lights are turned on and off when the doors are
opened or closed.
DOME LIGHT TIMING
The dome light will automatically illuminate when
the doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or
after the doors are closed.
Timing Entering The Vehicle
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
When the doors are unlocked, the dome light
will illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
When one of the doors is opened, the dome light
will illuminate for approximately three minutes.
When the doors are closed, the dome light will
automatically shut off after approximately 27
seconds.
The timing stops once the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN
position.
The dome light will turn off under any of the
followi
ng conditions:
The dome light is disabled when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The dome lights will turn off automatically when
the doors are locked.
The dome lights will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes of inactivity to
preser
ve the battery.
Timing Exiting The Vehicle
The dome light will illuminate under the following
conditi
ons when the ignition is placed to the OFF
position and the key is removed:
The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The opening of one of the doors (approximately
three minutes).
After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).
The dome light timing is disabled when the doors
a
r
e
l
oc
ked.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of
the lever.
Windshield Wiper Lever
1 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Pull For Front Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot
return to the “park” position, damage to the
wiper motor may occur.
2
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the two
detent positions for intermittent settings, the third
detent for low wiper operation and the fourth for
high wiper operation.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold wh
ile spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn
on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
Mist
Use this feature when weather conditions make
occasion
al usage of the wipers necessary. Push
the lever upward to the MIST position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 297.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snow fall on the
windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of
two detent positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position two is
the most sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the O
(off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
If the end of the multifunction lever rotates from off
to the
first intermittent setting or from the first
intermittent setting to the second intermittent
setting, the wipers will perform a round up to clean
the windshield.
Rain Sensor
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed posi
-
tion.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice or dried salt water is present on
t
h
e
w
i
ndshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on or off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 133.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
f
or the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is in
Rain Sensing mode and the ignition is cycled
from OFF to ON, the auto wiper will be
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
suppressed until vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper switch is moved
out of a
nd back into the Intermittent wipe posi
-
tion.
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The Rain
Sensing system will not operate if the NEUTRAL
gear is selected at speeds of 3
mph (5 km/h) or
less unless the wiper switch is moved or the
gear selector is moved out of NEUTRAL.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain
Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of
the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is
operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
NOTE:
If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is
shifte
d in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one
round up to clean the rear window.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operati
on and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation. If the
front wiper is set to Automatic mode (on the wiper
lever as well as enabled through Uconnect
Settings), placing the rear wiper in an intermittent
position will cause the front and rear wipers to sync
up. Turning the front wipers off will cause the rear
wipers to also stop.
To use the washer, push the lever
forward and hold while spray is desired. If
t
he le
ver is pushed while the wiper is in
the off position, the wiper will operate for
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent
setting, the wiper will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch
is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the
lever is released, the pump will resume normal
operation.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated under
the following conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically in
the case of a cold weather manual start with full
front defrost, and the ambient temperature is
below 40°F (4.4°C).
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically
when the rear defrost is turned on and the
ambient temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation — When
Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
Remote Start will resume its previous operation.
If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the
timer and operation will continue
Ú page 133.
Auto-On Rear Window Defroster/Windshield Wiper
De-Ice
r — If Equipped
When placing the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position, the Rear Window Defroster and
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will automatically turn on
when the outside ambient temperature is less than
40°F (4.4°C).
The Rear Window Defroster and Windshield Wiper
De-Ice
r automatically turn off after approximately
20
minutes. To manually shut the defroster/
windshield off, push the Rear Defrost button.
Auto On can be enabled or disabled through the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 133.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate
Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
s
e
t
t
i
n
g to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX
A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
facepl
ate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is
ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning
system is turned on, dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than e
xpected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an
accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle
water spray from the front of the radiator and
through the condenser. If the problem persists,
please contact an authorized dealer.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
f
a
c
e
p
l
ate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
(button on the touchscreen grayed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation
mode may automatically adjust to optimize
customer experience for warming, cooling,
dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead t
o excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
facepl
ate, to change the current setting.
The AUTO indicator illuminates when
AUTO is on. This feature automatically controls the
interior cabin temperature by adjusting distribution
and amount of airflow. Air Conditioning (A/C) may
be active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. Toggling this function will cause the
system to switch between manual override mode
and automatic modes
Ú page 47.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen
button, or push and release the button
on the
faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is
on. Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button
on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 20
minutes.
Driver And Passenger Up And Down
Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temper
ature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temper
ature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature
on/off.
The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
synchronize the passenger temperature setting
with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control
system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
will cause automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected using either
the blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
c
ontrol
knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
settin
g and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change
the ai
rflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution outlets are: instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be
individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air
is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
a
nd wa
rmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost
, side window demister outlets,
and panel outboard outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
settin
g works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the panel outboard outlets.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
syste
m to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
and passenger temperatures. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system
will achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode, and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer programmable feature within
Uconnect Settings.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automat
ic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost
mode is selected, or by changing the front blower
knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep,
say one of the following commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know:
V
oi
c
e
Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not adjust the
heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
Ú page 338.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
2
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
NOTE:
In the Red Special Series models, the cabin air
filter
was treated with a biocide substance having
antibacterial and antiviral properties based on the
active ingredient, citric acid.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
comfort. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element
located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during
a cold
weather manual start with
full defrost,
and when the
ambient temperature is below
40°F (4.4°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when
the Re
ar Defrost is operating and the
ambient
temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When Remote Start is active and the
outside
ambient temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate.
Exiting Remote Start will resume its previous
operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was
active, the timer and operation will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
NOTE:
The following chart is for Manual Override Oper-
ation, otherwise run in AUTO.
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger’s side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment proceed as
follows:
1. Unlock the compartment using the vehicle
emergency key.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on,
and blower on high. Roll
d
own the windows for a
minute to flush out the hot
air. Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid
C
onditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep windows
c
l
e
a
r
.
C
old Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield
f
ogging starts to occur,
move the control to
(Mix
Mode).
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2. Pull the handle to open the compartment.
Opening The Glove Compartment
Once the glove compartment is open, a light will
turn on
to illuminate the compartment.
NOTE:
Do not insert objects in the glove compartment
that will not allow the compartment to fully
close.
The glove compartment should be completely
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Console Storage Compartment
To open, push the storage handle and lift the
cover.
The center console can be adjusted by moving it
forward or rearward.
Front Armrest
Storage Compartment
Handle Grip
The handle grip is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel. The handle can be used to
enter or exit the vehicle or when traveling on rough
terrain.
Handle Grip
1 — Glove Compartment Handle
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
USB/AUX CONTROL
This feature allows an external device to be
plugged into the USB port or AUX Jack.
Front USB Port And AUX Jack
Located below the heating ventilation and air
conditi
oning controls is the front USB port and AUX
jack.
Rear Center Console USB Port
Located on the rear of the center console is a
s
econd USB port.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB port
may be
charge only, or media file capable.
Rear Center Console USB (Charge Only) Port — If Equipped
POWER OUTLETS
The front power outlet is located under the center
stack of the instrument panel. It only operates with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The power
outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
12 Volt Power Outlet
Models equipped with the optional "Smoker Kit”,
will have a cigar lighter instead of the power outlet
Ú page 52.
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not
damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power rating
is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
F94 Fuse 15A Blue Instrument Panel Power Outlet
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. The Power
Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring up to
150 Watts. Certain video game consoles will
exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
115 Volt Power Inverter
The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and
off whe
n a device is plugged in or removed.
In order for the Power Inverter to work, the engine
must be running and there must be no faults
detected with the alternator.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in
overload
protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the Power Inverter will
a
utomatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the Power Inverter
it will automatically reset. To avoid overloading the
circuit, check the power ratings on electrical
devices prior to using the Power Inverter.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu
-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
batter
y will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
2
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
dealer
through Mopar® parts.
The cigar lighter is located under the center stack of
the Instrument Panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
Cigar Lighter
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically
return
s to its initial position and is ready to be
used.
ASHTRAY — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through
Mopar® parts.
The ashtray is a plastic container that can be
placed into one of the cup holders.
Ashtray Location
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very
hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar
lighter with care. Always check that the cigar
lighter has turned off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not
damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power rating
is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
The passenger door windows can also be operated
by using the single window controls on the
passenger door trim panel. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for
up to t
hree minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switch
es have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down for a short period of time,
then release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
a
nd release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch
briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-cl
osure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigge
r the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
compl
etely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the
window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key
-
less Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN posi-
tion. Occupants, particularly unattended
c
hildren, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
2
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
switch (the indicator light on the switch will turn
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout switch again (the
indicator light on the switch will turn off).
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
DUAL PANE PANORAMIC POWER SUNROOF
WITH POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Sunshade Open/Close
2 — Power Sunroof Open/Close
3 — Venting Sunroof
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. Occu
-
pants, particularly unattended children, can
b
ecome entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
To retract the sunroof to the open position, push
the Open/Close switch and the sunroof will fully
open. The sunroof can be stopped in any position
by pushing/pulling the switch a second time while
opening.
To close the sunroof completely, pull the Open/
Close s
witch and the sunroof will fully close. The
sunroof can be stopped in any position by pushing/
pulling the switch a second time while it is closing.
VENTING SUNROOF
To vent the sunroof push the vent switch.
NOTE:
The vent switch has the automatic function only at
the ope
ning of the sunroof. During the closing of
the sunroof, the switch must be held until closed.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
UNSHADE
Express Open/Close
Push the shade switch for about one-half second
and th
e shade will automatically open. During the
automatic open operation, any movement of the
shade switch will stop the shade.
Pull the shade switch for about one-half second
and th
e shade will automatically close. During the
automatic close operation, any movement of the
shade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
To open the shade part way, push the shade switch
briefl
y and release.
To close the shade part way, pull the shade switch
briefly and release.
NOTE:
The sunroof and the shade controls will operate
only when the ignition is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
If the Remote Start functionality is active, it is
not possible to move the sunroof.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
WARNING!
Do not let children play with the sunroof.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat
-
tended children, can become entrapped by
the pow
er sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be severely injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push
the s
afety latch release lever toward the
passenger side of the vehicle. The hood
release lever is located behind the center front
edge of the hood.
Safety Latch
Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert
it into the seat key hole located on the
underside of the hood. Be sure the rod is locked
into position.
Locking Tab
Support Rod And Seat
1 — Safety Latch Location
1 — Support Rod
2 — Support Rod Seat
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
LIFTGATE
UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate
the power door lock switches located on the driver
door handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic liftgate
releas
e and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
Liftgate Handle Location
The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into th
e electronic liftgate release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5
ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to open
with one fluid motion.
Emergency Opening
Proceed as follows:
1. R
emove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fold
the rear seats forward.
3. Usi
ng the supplied screwdriver (located under
cargo
floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab.
Emergency Opening Tab Location
4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab slot
to tri
gger the release tab of the liftgate.
Emergency Release Tab Slot Location
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12
inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Passive Entry Lock Button
1 — Yellow Tab
1 — Release Tab Slot
2
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate
closing handle and pull in a downward motion to
close the liftgate.
Closing Liftgate
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possess
ion of the key fob because the liftgate may
be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(
1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry lock button located to
t
he right of the outside handle release will lock the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec-
tronic liftgate release.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Removable Rear Shelf — If Equipped
To remove rear shelf, proceed as follows:
1. D
isconnect the two links that support the
shelf at the eyelets.
Rear Shelf Support Links
2. Li
ft the rear part of the overhead luggage shelf.
3
.
C
l
e
ar the pins placed outside of the shelf, and
then
remove the rear shelf pulling it upwards.
4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo area,
or behind the front seatbacks.
Adjusting The Rear Shelf
Rear Shelf Pin
Cargo Load Floor
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can
b
e adj
usted as needed.
1 — Liftgate Pull Handle
1 — Eyelets
2 — Links
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Position 1 (Lowered Position):
This position allows you to make the load floor flat
for eas
e of loading/unloading objects from the
cargo area. This position also makes it possible to
use the space below as another compartment for
storing fragile or smaller objects.
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat
a
re folded flat, it creates space for objects of long
dimensions. This position is recommended only
when transporting objects, then move the load
floor back to position 1.
Table Tilt Load
In addition to the two positions described
p
reviously, the load floor can also be placed in a
tilted position, slanted toward the rear seatbacks
as to ease the access to the underlying zone of the
luggage compartment (e.g. to pick up the spare tire
or the Tire Service Kit).
Place the load floor in a way that it rests at the
supports 1 and 2 on the sides of the cargo area.
The load floor provides securing of any cargo inside
this position, so that the cargo will not slide in the
case of sudden braking.
Load Floor
Table Tilt Load Supports
Access To The Loading Floor
To access the double load compartment, proceed
as foll
ows:
1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle.
Load Floor Handle
2. Place the desired objects inside the
compartment.
1 — Loading Floor Support One
2 — Loading Floor Support Two
2
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Reposition the load floor.
Cargo Area Storage
Displacement Load Floor
To position the load floor from the lower to the
u
pper position, proceed as follows:
1. Grab the load floor handle and lift up the load
floor.
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel
guides and on the rear cross member.
Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and
c
ontain
er carrier, proceed as follows:
1. Grab the load floor handle and remove the
floor.
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Anchor
ing Of The Load
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area
f
loor, should be used to safely secure loads when
the vehicle is moving.
Tie-Downs
The side panels may be equipped with three
grocery hooks (one on the left side and two on the
right side) for securing loads that are not
excessively heavy.
Grocery Hook
Grocery Hooks
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central
position with respect to cargo area.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Cargo Box — If Equipped
The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box
that can be used for the storage of objects that
allows you to obtain a uniform level when loading.
Cargo Box
NOTE:
The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity of
distri
buted weight equal to 242 lb (110 kg).
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof Luggage
Rack for transporting accessories.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo
is placed on the Roof Luggage Rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
dealer
through Mopar® parts. External racks do
not increase the total load carrying capacity of the
vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and
luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on
the Roof Luggage Rack, do not exceed the
maximum vehicle load capacity.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggag
e rack, must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo
area.
Do not use the retractable roof when using the
crossbars.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
in personal injury or property damage. Follow
the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appro
-
priately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
should be secured to both the front and rear of
the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between
the surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
upward lift. It is recommended to not carry
large flat loads, such as wood panels or surf
-
boards, which may result in damage to the
c
argo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to crossbars
first, with tie down loops used as additional
securing points if needed. Tie loops are
intended as supplementary tie down points
only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with
the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
2
62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63
3
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display
Ú page 64.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. T
emperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather or
up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
d
oor
i
s
located.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the OFF position,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Locations
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65
Setting the system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Left Arrow Button
Push the
l
eft
a
r
r
ow
button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or submenu item.
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the u
p
a
r
r
ow
button to scroll
upward through the main menu.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right
arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
d
ow
n
a
r
r
ow button to
scroll downward through the main menu.
OK Button
Push the
O
K
b
u
t
t
on to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a main
menu i
tem. Push and hold the
OK button for one
second to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
OIL CHANGE RESET
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indica
tor system. The “Oil Change Due” message
will display in the instrument cluster display for five
seconds after a single chime has sounded to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval.
The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each t
ime the ignition is cycled to the ON or RUN
position. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure:
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGIN
E START/STOP button and cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the ve
hicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. See an authorized dealer to have the oil life
reset.
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
3
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the
center of the instrument cluster. Menu items
may vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer is displayed in the
i
n
s
t
r
u
ment cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle units (mph or km/h) of the
speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until “Vehicle Info” is highlighted in the
instru
ment cluster display. Push and release the
right
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be
displayed. Push the
right
or
left arrow button
to scroll through the following information displays:
Tire Pressure — View the information relating to
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (If
Equipped).
Coolant Temperature — View the engine coolant
temperature.
Trans Temperature — View the trans oil
temperature.
Oil Temperature — View the oil temperature.
Battery Voltage — View the voltage value (state
of charge) of the battery.
Service — View the service status message(s) (If
Equipped).
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu title displayed
is hig
hlighted in the instrument cluster display.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSen
se status and information. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to be
met
Ú page 133.
Fuel Economy
This menu item allows you to view the fuel
economy of the vehicle. The following will display:
Range (Miles or km)
Current Consumption (mpg or L/100 km or
km/L)
Average Consumption (mpg or L/100 km or
km/L)
Reset procedure shown at the bottom of the
d
isplay.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the
instru
ment cluster display. Toggle the
left
or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A
or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed
i
n
t
h
e
instrument cluster display.
This menu shows messages related to Stop/Start.
Only one message can be viewed at a time until the
condition is cleared. When the Stop/Start is
engaged (and the engine is off), the associated
hardware telltale is turned on. Whenever a user
pushes the Stop/Start button on the central stack,
a pop-up message of the Stop/Start status will
appear on the instrument cluster display.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio menu title is displayed in the
instru
ment cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted
in the
instrument cluster display. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the
left
or
right arrow button will
allow
you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
This menu item allows you to change the position
of the information on the display.
Display Gears (Vehicles With Reconfigurable
Multi-Functional Display And Automatic
Transmission)
By selecting this item, you can select the display
mode, t
he particulars relating to the automatic
transmission, and choose between the following
options:
“Single digit”
The right side of the display will show the letter
concern
ing the automatic transmission gear
selector (P,R,N or D) position. After approxi
-
mately two seconds, the letter will be displayed
in a c
entral position.
“Full PRND”
The letters PRND will display on the right side,
the po
sition assumed by the gear selector will
be highlighted in the display. During the opera
-
tion in sequential mode (“AutoStick”), in place
of the
letter D, the gear will be will be displayed.
In The Upper Left/Top Right
The information relating to the following can be
displa
yed:
External temperature
Ignition Button — If Equipped
Compass — If Equipped
Date (Month/Day)
Time (Hours/Minutes)
In the central area of the display, you can view all
of
t
h
e
information listed above as well as the
following:
Compass — If Equipped
Speed Display — If Equipped
Date (Day/Month/Year)
Time
Compass — If Equipped
Ignition Button — If Equipped
External Temp — If equipped
Menu Item
Distance Traveled A (Trip A)
Distance Traveled B (Trip B)
Restore Default Settings
Selecting this item, and you can reset and restore
t
he default settings.
Settings
This menu item allows you to change the settings
for the following:
Display
Units
Clock and Date
Security
Safety and Assistance
Lights
Doors and Locks
NOTE:
Some items may be displayed and managed
through
the Uconnect system.
Vehicles Equipped With Multi-functional Display
Reconfigurable:
The following menu/submenu items are available
in the cluster display.
3
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Vehicle Shut Off (If Equipped)”
By selecting the item “Vehicle Shut Off”, you can
turn of
f the engine from the instrument cluster.
This feature is available in the event of an ignition
switch failure, and will display instructions for
turning off the engine via the instrument cluster
display controls.
“Display”
By selecting the “Display,” you can access the
followi
ng setting:
Language: allows you to select the language in
which to display the information/warnings.
“Units Of Measure”
By selecting the item “Units of Measure,” you can
select
the unit of measure to use for displaying
various magnitudes.
Possible options are:
US
Metric
Custom
“Clock & Date”
By selecting the item, “Clock & Date” you can
a
djust the clock.
Possible options are:
Set Time: adjust hours/minutes
Set Format: adjust the time format “12h”
(12 hours) or “24h” (24 hours)
Set Date: adjust day/month/year
“Security”
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the
f
ollowing adjustments:
Speed Warning:
Set the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is
notifie
d through a visual and acoustic signaling
(display of a message and a symbol on the
display).
When the speed warning is set, the icon should
remain visualized for the same duration time of
the pop-up. If the driver exceeded the set speed,
the icon should remain for however long the
vehicle is over the set speed.
Driver may also turn the Speed Warning “OFF”
should
you choose not to use this feature.
Seat Belt Reminder:
This function is only viewable when the Seat Belt
Remind
er (SBR) system is active.
Hill Start Assist:
Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start Assist
system
.
Passenger Air Bag — If Equipped
Front passenger air bag may be enabled or
disabl
ed.
“Lights”
By selecting the item “Lights,” you can make the
followin
g adjustments:
Headlight Off Delay: set the delay for headlight
shutoff after engine shutoff
Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of
headlight brightness
Daytime Running Lights: activate/deactivate
the daytime running lights
Cornering lights: activate/deactivate the
cornering lights (If Equipped)
Interior Ambient lights: adjust the level of inte-
rior ambient lights
Greeting Lights: activate / deactivate greeting
lights
“Doors & Locks”
By selecting the item “Doors & Locks,” you can
make t
he following adjustments:
Auto Door Lock: activate/deactivate the auto-
matic locking of the doors with the vehicle
m
ov
i
n
g
Auto Unlock On Exit: automatic unlocking of the
doors when exiting the vehicle
Flash Light with Lock: activate the direction indi-
cators when closing the doors
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
Sound Horn With Lock: activate/deactivate the
horn when pushing the LOCK button on the key
fob. The options are “Off,” “First Press,” and
“Second Press”
Horn With Remote Start: activate/deactivate
the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine
with the key fob
Remote Door Unlock: allows you to open the
driver door only on the first push of the UNLOCK
button on the key fob
“Compass”
By selecting the item “Compass” you can make the
f
ollowing adjustments:
Compass Calibration
Compass Variance
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip computer is used to display information on
car operation when the key is turned to the RUN
position.
This function allows you to define two separate
trips
called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where the car's
“complete trips” are monitored in an independent
manner.
Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new trip).
To perform a reset, push and hold the
OK button on
the steering wheel controls.
“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the figures
relati
ng to:
Distance Traveled
Average Consumption
Travel Time (driving time)
Quantities Displayed
Distance Traveled
Indicates the distance traveled by the start of
the new trip.
Average Consumption
Represents the average fuel consumption since
the start of the new trip.
Travel Time
Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.
OK Button
Short Push Of The Button: display of various
p
arameters.
Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities and
begin a new trip.
New trip
Starts after reset:
“Manual” by pushing the OK button.
“Automatic” when the “distance” reaches the
value of 62140 (99999.9 km) or when the
“time
travel” reaches the value of 999.59
(999 hours and 59 minutes).
After each disconnection and reconnection of
the battery.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status. Some telltales are optional and may not
appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators will
alert
you to a vehicle condition that may become
serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you start
your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps
remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
3
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the
i
g
n
i
t
i
on is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes
on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parkin
g brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capaci
ty in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
corneri
ng maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applie
d. It does not show the degree of brake appli
-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on whi
le the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door
is ajar/open and not fully closed. The
light
will show which doors are currently
ajar/open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steeri
ng (EPS) system Ú page 93.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This light informs you of a problem with
the ETC system. If a problem is detected
w
h
i
l
e
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of an overheated engine condition. If the
e
n
g
i
n
e
coolant temperature is too high,
this light will illuminate and a single
chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 281.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
liftgate is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light
turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
correct
ed. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
3
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light will illuminate if there is a
failure of the oil pressure sensor. If this
light
illuminates, take it to an authorized
dealer and have them inspect it.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high.
If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuck
led. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound
Ú page 240.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
v
e
h
i
c
l
e security system is arming, and then will
flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Transmission Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster
d
i
s
p
l
a
y and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an authorized
dealer if the message remains after restarting the
engine.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
C
on
t
a
c
t
a local authorized dealer for
service
Ú page 97.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
p
l
a
c
e
d
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is pla
ced in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Audio System Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to report a failure
of the Audio System. Contact an
authori
zed dealership as soon as
possible.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
functi
oning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road
condition.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this
light
will turn on, and remain on until fuel
is added.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
warnin
gs when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the
use of a turn signal
Ú page 117.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid white/green to flashing yellow.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
r
e
q
u
i
r
es service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
D
i
a
g
n
os
tic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through
several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
as soon as possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
stays
on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
3
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
W
a
r
n
i
n
g System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service
Ú page 232.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
p
r
op
e
r
l
y and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire p
ressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be che
cked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipp
ed with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a
failure with the tow hook. Contact an
a
u
t
h
or
i
zed dealer for service.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This
may occ
ur with severe usage, such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely
pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the
transmission into PARK and run the engine at idle
or slightly higher until the light turns off.
4WD Over Temperature Warning Light
The icon will appear on the instrument
panel display to indicate overheating of
t
h
e
4
W
D system. The mode selected by
the user will be applied as soon as the
system exits the overheating condition.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
rear d
riveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
increased torque at the wheels
Ú page 90.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive LOCK mode.
The fr
ont and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together, forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed
Ú page 90.
Dusk Sensor Malfunction Indicator Light
This symbol lights up (together with a
dedicated message on display) when a
dusk s
ensor malfunction is detected
Ú page 38.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light
in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running.
If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable sys-
tem operation or sensor damage may result
w
hen using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using after
-
market tire sealants may cause the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
b
ecome
inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
3
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
igniti
on is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system
will be on, even if it was turned off previously.
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a
malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an
accident has occurred, and the system
has sh
ut the fuel off.
Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel
cutoff failure. If this light illuminates, take
it to a
n authorized dealer and have them
inspect it.
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
vehicle security system has detected an
a
t
t
e
m
p
t to break into the vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
the Ve
hicle Security Warning Light could illuminate
if a problem with the system is detected. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off
after two seconds.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic
high beam headlights are on.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 95.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 36.
Hazard Warning Lights
The hazard warning indicators light up
when the vehicles Hazard Warning
flashe
r switch has been pushed.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
t
u
r
n
e
d
on Ú page 36.
Sport Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is
active.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
f
l
a
s
h
independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
solid w
hen HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the
4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30
mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Idle Coasting — If Equipped
The Idle Coasting feature saves fuel by
allowing engine speeds to drop to idle.
W
h
e
n
I
dle Coasting is active, the Idle
Coasting Indicator Light is shown in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Light Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is light
sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
have a
n authorized dealer inspect it.
Speed Warning Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on,
the speed warning telltale will illuminate
i
n
t
h
e
instrument cluster with a number
matching the set speed. When the set
speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound along
with pop-up message of “Speed Warning
Exceeded.” Speed Warning can be turned on and
off in the instrument cluster display.
The number “55” is only an example of a speed
that c
an be set.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on.
With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready/Canceled Indicator
Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control function is ready (but
not set
), or canceled, by the driver
Ú page 95.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well
as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
3
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 133.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Ma
lfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may
n
ot be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system
should be determined not ready for the I/M test,
your vehicle may fail the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
includ
ing personal information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start
this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is
not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is
not rea
dy, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
80
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your
seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRA
L or PARK position. Apply the brake before
shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or warm engine is
obtaine
d without pumping or pressing the accel-
erator pedal.
Proceed as follows:
1. S
et the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the
gear selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the
accel
erator.
3. Press the START/STOP ignition button and
release it as soon as the engine is started.
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition
in the OFF position and wait 10-15 seconds
before attempting to restart the engine.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Press briefly the
START/STOP ignition button and release it. The
starter motor will continue to run but will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” procedure, and has not
experienced an extended park condition as
identified in “Extended Park Starting” procedure
below, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there.
Crank the engine for no more than 10 seconds.
This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in the RUN
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi
-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other c
ontrols, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt
to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 81
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold
conditions an externally powered electric block
heater (if equipped) is required for the 1.3L Turbo
engine below -20°F (-29°C).
To prevent possible engine damage while starting
at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine
cranking when the ambient temperature is less
than -20°F (-29°C) for the 1.3L Turbo engine, and
the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. The
message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed
in the instrument cluster when the ambient
temperature is below -4°F (-20°C) at the time the
engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible
crank delays at the next cold start.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
the battery to ensure a full battery charge
during the crank cycle.
2. Press the START/STOP ignition button and
relea
se it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool,
t
hen repeat the Extended Park Starting
procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow
the starter to cool for at least
10
minutes, then repeat the procedure.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
Proceed as follows:
Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced
RPM, without accelerating suddenly.
It is recommended to wait until the engine
coolant temperature gauge starts to rise for
maximum performance.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
To shut off the engine with a vehicle speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the
igniti
on or push the START/STOP button three
times consecutively within a few seconds. The
engine will shut down, and the ignition will be
placed in the RUN position.
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key
(Keyless Enter ‘n Go™)
Turning off the car (cycle the ignition from the RUN
p
osition
to the OFF position), the power supply to
the accessories are maintained for a period of
three minutes.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
w
ay. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 278.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
4
82 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the vehicle fails to shut off using the ignition
Ú page 64.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in
R
UN wi
ll sound a short chime that reminds the
driver to place the ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
window
switches remain active for three minutes.
Opening a front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temper
ature inside the engine compartment to
cool before shutting off the engine.
TURBOCHARGER “COOL DOWN” —
I
F EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to
cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off.
Depending on the type of driving and the amount
of cargo, the pump will run for up to 10
minutes
after
the engine has been shut off to circulate
coolant through the turbocharger. Although the
pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is
normal to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km
). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
s
p
e
e
d
s
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desira
ble.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades
Ú page 345.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few th
ousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
You can engage the EPB in two ways:
Manually, by applying the parking brake switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the customer programmable features
section of the Uconnect settings or in “Safe
Hold” conditions.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
STARTING AND OPERATING 83
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back
of the vehicle while the EPB engages. Once the
parking brake is fully engaged, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the
brake pedal while you apply the EPB, you may
notice a small amount of brake pedal movement.
The EPB can be applied even when the ignition is
in the OFF position however, it can only be released
when the ignition is in the RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch
is hel
d for longer than 60 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extin
-
guish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the EPB
w
ill automatically engage whenever the
transmission is moved into PARK when the ignition
switch is in the STOP/OFF position. If your foot is on
the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the EPB is engaging.
The EPB will be automatically released if the
driver
's seat belt is buckled (only in case of
automatic transmission) and driver's intention to
start (in forward or reverse direction) is recognized
by the system.
To release the EPB manually, the ignition must be
in the
RUN position. Put your foot on the brake
pedal, then push the EPB switch down
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back
of the car while the parking brake disengages. You
may also notice a small amount of movement in
the brake pedal. Once the EPB is fully disengaged,
the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front w
heels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the EPB before placing the gear selector in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The EPB should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
d
angerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis
-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi
-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other c
ontrols, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
4
84 STARTING AND OPERATING
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the EPB while the vehicle is in
motion, maintain upward pressure on the EPB
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The
Brake Warning Light could illuminate in case the
hydraulic system is not available. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought
to a complete stop using the EPB, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 1.9
mph (3 km/h) the EPB
will r
emain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system
, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the Brake Warning Light
flashing. In this status, some EPB functionalities
may be deactivated. In this event, urgent service of
the EPB system is required. Do not rely on the EPB
to hold the vehicle stationary.
AUTO PARK BRAKE
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is below
1.9
mph (3 km/h) and the automatic transmission
is placed in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF position. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the
Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
position while the transmission is placed in PARK
and the ignition is in the RUN position. In some
cases, if the ignition is cycled from ON/RUN to OFF
and the gear selector is not firmly locked in the
PARK position, EPB applies automatically even if
Auto Park Brake has been previously disabled.
SAFEHOLD
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that
will engage the parking brake automatically if the
vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition is in the
RUN position.
The EPB will automatically engage if all of the
followin
g conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the EP
B Switch while the driver door is open and
the brake pedal is pressed. Once manually
bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the
vehicle reaches 12
mph (20 km/h) or the ignition
is placed to the OFF position and back to RUN
again.
BRAKE SERVICE MODE
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. You should only enter Brake Service
Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necess
ary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the EPB
system, this can only be done after retracting the
EPB actuator. The actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering the Brake Service Mode. This
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to
the brake system. Be sure the parking brake is
fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 85
(Continued)
menu based system will guide you through the
steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met
in orde
r to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be disabled.
The transmission must be in park or neutral.
The EPB switch not activated.
The vehicle in ignition RUN position.
The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
c
on
t
i
n
u
ously while the ignition is in the RUN
position.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluste
r if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluste
r if Brake Service Mode cannot be deacti-
vated.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifti
ng out of PARK.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed
beside the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster display. To select a gear range, push the
lock button on the gear selector and move the
selector rearward or forward. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds
Ú page 90. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts
i
ts shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis
-
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
a
gainst unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
4
86 STARTING AND OPERATING
GEAR SELECTOR
The transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using
the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position) will
manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERS
E, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector Lock Button
This transmission has been developed to meet the
needs
of the manufacturer’s current and future
lineup of FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and
calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and drive-line combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving situations
and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the ac
celerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
DO NOT press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
d
angerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis
-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN posi
-
tion. A child could operate power windows,
other c
ontrols, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
(Continued)
(Continued)
GEAR RANGES
PARK (P)
This range supplements the Electric Park Brake
(
E
P
B
)
by locking the transmission. The engine can
be started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of
PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi
-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
b
linking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally (or stopped) and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running or the propulsion system
is active. Before exiting a vehicle, always come
to a complete stop, then apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in
the OFF position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, press the lock button
on the gear selector, and firmly move the gear
selector all the way forward until it stops and is
fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift
into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
p
rolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
Electric Park Brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as whe
n operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds or while towing a heavy trailer), use the
AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear. Under
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
d
angerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis
-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 129.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 283.
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operati
ng limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce
engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may
illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm up time of the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm.
Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
f
eatur
e providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance. This system can also provide
you with more control during passing, city driving,
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(besid
e the DRIVE position), it can be moved
forward and rearward. This allows the driver to
manually select the transmission gear being used.
Moving the gear selector forward (-) triggers a
downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current
gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift
up or d
own when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as
described below:
The transmission will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST or SECOND gear (depending on model)
when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as
the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can
be helpful in snow or icy conditions. Tap the gear
selector forward or rearward to select the
desired gear after the vehicle is brought to a
stop.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
Avoid using Cruise Control when AutoStick is
engaged because the transmission will not shift
automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or
out of the AutoStick position at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
4
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME MODE
Transmission function is electronically monitored
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed
gear, or may remain in neutral. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging
the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transm
ission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. S
hif
t the transmission into PARK, if possible. If
n
ot
,
s
hift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. S
hif
t into the desired gear range. If the
p
r
ob
l
e
m is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recomme
nd that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if
the problem could recur. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
(K
EYLESS VEHICLE)
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock, which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
position. Also, the transmission is locked in PARK
whenever the ignition is in the OFF position.
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the ignition must be in the RUN position
(engine running or not) and the brake pedal must
be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before
pushing the button on the gear selector to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
Active Drive (4WD) And Active Drive Low (4WD
LOW)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power
Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic with
no driver inputs or additional driving skills
required. Under normal driving conditions, the
front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the
front wheel traction loss, the greater the power
transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque
will be sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to
improve vehicle launch and performance
characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type
tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power
transfer unit.
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
The four-wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in
normal driving mode.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of mode
when t
he vehicle exceeds the speed of 75
mph
(
1
2
0
k
m
/h).
Enabling Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
The buttons for the activation of four-wheel drive
a
re loc
ated on the Selec-Terrain switch and allow
you to select the following:
4WD LOCK
4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
4WD LOCK Button
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure
immedi
ate availability of torque to the rear drive
axles. This feature is selectable in AUTO mode and
automatic in the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK
can be enabled by the following ways:
When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated from
AUTO to any other off-road modes.
Active Drive With Low Control
(Trailhawk Models Only)
4WD LOW Button (Trailhawk)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road
performance in all modes. To enable 4WD LOW,
please follow the steps below:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in RUN
p
osition or with the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and push the 4WD
LOW button once. The instrument cluster will
display the message "4WD LOW" once the shift is
complete.
NOTE:
Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and
then become active on the Selec-Terrain switch
until the shift is complete.
The instrument cluster display will illuminate the
"4WD LOW" icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must
be sta
tionary and the transmission shifted into
NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW button once.
4
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to
provide the best performance for all terrains.
MODE SELECTION GUIDE
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired
mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a
continuous operation, is fully automatic and can
be used on and off-road. This mode balances
traction to ensure maneuverability and acceler
-
ation improvement compared to a vehicle with
t
wo-wheel drive. This mode also reduces fuel
consumption, since it allows the disconnect of
the drive shaft where conditions permit.
SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater
stability under conditions of bad weather. It's
used on and off-road and on surfaces with poor
traction, such as roads covered with snow.
When in SNOW mode (depending on certain
operating conditions), the transmission will use
SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage, except
for in 4WD LOW (Trailhawk models only).
SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as sandy bottoms. The
transmission is set to provide maximum trac
-
tion. This mode allows more wheel spin and
higher
shift points to help motor through loose
areas.
MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as roads covered by
mud or wet grass.
ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only avail-
able in 4WD LOW. The device sets the vehicle to
m
a
x
i
m
i
ze traction and allow the highest
steering capacity for off-road surfaces. This
mode gives you the maximum performance
off-road. Use for low speed obstacles such as
large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Trailhawk package.
Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed
Control for steep downhill control
Ú page 222.
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTERS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Active Grille
Shutters. Active Grille Shutters is an automatic
system with mobile flaps applied in front of the
cooling module that aims to improve vehicle
aerodynamic efficiency with its automatic
opening/closing movement. The opening/closing
movement of the Active Grill Shutters reduces
consumption while ensuring optimal engine
operating temperature conditions.
When a greater air flow is required for cooling (e.g.
when d
riving in urban traffic) the flaps open,
whereas when temperature is low or air flow is
enough (example when driving on highways), the
flaps close.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” OR “POWER
STEERI
NG ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM”
message and a steering wheel icon are displayed
on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance
Ú page 64.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe
-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or
pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically
restart the engine.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must O
ccur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section
Ú page 64.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and
the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
4
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed
in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start
Screen. In the following situations the engine will
not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode (if
equipped with 4WD).
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
sure with vehicle in DRIVE position.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP.
Steering angle is beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
s
e
v
e
r
a
l times without the Stop/Start system going
into a STOP/START READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically
re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automat
ically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission gear selector is moved out of
DRIVE except in the PARK and NEUTRAL posi
-
tion.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode (if
equipped with 4WD).
A system fault is present.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
E
l
e
c
t
r
ic Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal
released.
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled.
The engine hood has been opened.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine
of
f
,
t
h
e engine may require a manual restart and
the Electric Park Brake may require a manual
release (press brake pedal and push Electric Park
Brake switch)
Ú page 64.
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
center console). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display and the
Autostop mode will be disabled
Ú page 64.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an
ON cond
ition every time the ignition is turned off
and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 64.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appear
s in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant preset
speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining a
set distance between you and the vehicle ahead
using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to automati
-
cally adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20
mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
4
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The Cruise Control function will not work in 4WD
Low.
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push and release the
SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
The Cruise Indicator Light, along with set speed will
also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
s
p
e
e
d
by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1
mph speed adjustment. Each
s
u
b
s
e
q
uent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1
mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab
-
lished.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subseq
uent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1
km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab
-
lished.
Accelerating For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system OFF when you
are not using it.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
(Continued)
Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20
mph (32 km/h).
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Cruise Control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function
performs differently if your vehicle is not equipped
with ACC
Ú page 95.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged
in lig
ht to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a
radar sensor and a forward facing camera
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you
to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of
t
h
e
Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
sion Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the feature selected
Ú page 349.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsi
-
bility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
condit
ions, vehicle speed, distance to the
vehicle ahead and, most importantly, brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance condi
-
tions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have
steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
WARNING!
4
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Cruise Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button
until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“
Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
settin
g has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
t
he display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
displa
y selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20
mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displa
y will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
tions:
When in 4WD Low.
When you apply the brakes.
When the parking brake is applied.
When the gear selector is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL.
When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed
range.
When the brakes are overheated.
When driver switches Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) to Full Off mode.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — Distance Setting Decrease
5 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
7 — RES/Resume
8 — Distance Setting Increase
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adapti
ve Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show
the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
ACC en
abled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed
Speed Cruise Control mode.
ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set when the
vehicl
e speed is above 20
mph (32 km/h), the set
s
p
e
e
d
shall be the current speed of the vehicle.
Neither system cannot be set below 20
mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
be controlling the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
only be determined by the position of the accel
-
erator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always ensure that the
system is off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system
will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no
alarm will sound even if you are too close to the
vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
4
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will show the last set speed.
ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control can only be
resumed at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicl
e in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
s
p
e
e
d
by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subseq
uent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1
mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
s
peed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subseq
uent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1
km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
ments until the button is released. The new set
s
peed is reflected in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) but
ton or
SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current
speed of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active:
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the
vehicle.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the
ACC Set With Target Detected Light. The system
will then adjust vehicle speed automatically to
maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 99.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however
, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs,
a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument
cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC
continues to apply its maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
displa
y is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active
when passing on the left hand side.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“FRONT RADAR SENSOR TEMPORARILY
BLOCKED” WARNING
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked
” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels
with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked
” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the fascia/bumper.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not use solvents or abrasive pastes. The
radar is equipped with a defrost system, so in
some climatic conditions it could reach high
temperatures. Wait at least 30 seconds after
the engine has been placed in the OFF mode
before touching the sensor.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see your authorized
dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material. Doing so
could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc
-
tion.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
n
o longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function when reactivated.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow or front-end protector is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” warning will display to indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due
to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windsh
ield” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should
examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functi
onality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windsh
ield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and
forward facing camera inspected at an authorized
dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Frontal Camera Service Required”, “Cruise Control
Service Required”, or “Cruise Control Temporarily
Unavailable", there may be an internal system fault
or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected.
Once the vehicle is out of the curve, the system will
resume your original set speed. This is a part of
normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on
hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
4
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
following lane changing example, ACC has not yet
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not
detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a
vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
situations where the vehicle you are following exits
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear and/or front fascia and a detected
obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g.
during a parking maneuver).
For limitations of this system and
recomme
ndations, see Ú page 108.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(
enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense is active when the gear selector is
shifted to REVERSE or to a forward gear and an
obstacle is detected, as long as the system is on.
When the gear selector is shifted to NEUTRAL (or
PARK in case of automatic gearbox), the system
becomes inactive. When the vehicle is moving
forward, the system will remain active until the
vehicle speed remains below approximately
11
mph (18 km/h). Reducing the speed
approximately below 9 mph (15 km/h), the system
will c
ome back active. When the vehicle is moving
in REVERSE, the system will remain active as long
as the speed remains below the maximum
operating speed of 7
mph (11 km/h). When the
maximum speed limit is exceeded, the system is
disabled and the ParkSense switch LED with
illuminate. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed reduces below approximately
6
mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
On vehicles equipped with both Front and Rear
ParkSense, there are six sensors located in the
rear fascia/bumper. Vehicles only equipped with
Rear ParkSense have four sensors located in the
rear fascia/bumper.
The sensors monitor the area behind the vehicle
that i
s within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors
can detect obstacles from approximately
12
inches (30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from
the re
ar fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
NOTE:
For information on ParkSense Active Park Assist,
see Ú p
age 111.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
f
ascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12
inches (30 cm) up to 39 inches (100 cm) from
the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected from
the Customer - Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect system
Ú page 133.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
t
he instrument cluster display Ú page 64. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
b
etween the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or
rear regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
object, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle, and the audible chime will
increase as the object gets closer to the vehicle.
4
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — Solid Center Arc 7 — Flashing Center Arc
2 — Flashing Center Arc 8 — Solid Center Arc
3 — Flashing Left/Center/Right Arcs 9 — Solid Center Arc
4 — Flashing Left/Center/Right Arcs 10 — Solid Center Arc
5 — Flashing Left/Center/Right Arcs 11 — Flashing Arcs
6 — Flashing Left/Center/Right Arcs 12 — Flashing Arcs
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audible tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
59 inch
es
(150 c
m)
59–52 inches
(150-1
30 cm)
52-41 inches
(130-105 cm)
41-34 inches
(105-85 cm)
34-24 inches
(85-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than
12 inch
es
(30 cm
)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime Non
e Audible chime increases as the object gets closer to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 39 inches
(100 cm)
39-32 inches
(100-80 cm)
32-24 inches
(80-60 cm)
24-12 inches
(60-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime Non
e Audible chime increases as the object gets close to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes
4
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audibl
e alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, and
the vehicle is stationary. If the obstacle has been
detected within less than 12
inches (30 cm), then
the Parksense will not turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
s
elected from the Customer-Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect system
Ú page 133.
If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime volume
s
ettings will not be accessible from the instrument
cluster display.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and hi
gh. The factory default volume setting is
medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state
through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch, located on
t
h
e
s
w
itch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the sy
stem, the instrument cluster display
Ú page 64 will show the “ParkSense Disabled”
message for approximately five seconds.
The ParkSense switch LED turns on when the
s
ystem
is disabled by pushing the switch, as well
as in case of failure or temporary disabling
conditions. The ParkSense switch LED will be off
when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and
then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
When the ParkSense System has detected a
faulted condition, the instrument cluster display
will actuate a single chime, and it will show the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
five seconds. Under this condition, ParkSense will
not operate.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSOR
S" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear
see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIR
ED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
cycle the ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
etc. are placed within 12
inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “PARK
-
SENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
m
essage to be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within a
6.5 ft
(2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
cause
false alerts and possibly blockage.
There may be a delay in the object detection
rate if the object is moving.
The operation of the rear sensors is automati-
cally deactivated when the trailer's electric plug
is ins
erted in the vehicle's tow hook socket,
while the front sensors stay active and can
provide acoustic and visual warnings. The rear
sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer's cable plug is removed.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING (SDW)
S
YSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system has the
function of detecting the presence of side
obstacles near the vehicle using the parking
sensors located in the front and rear bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect system
Ú page 133.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assemb
ly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom
-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulde
r when using ParkSense.
4
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system warns the driver with an acoustic
signal and where provided, with visual indications
on the instrument panel display.
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if
on when the system is sounding an audible
tone.
The alert chime is activated only when the
obstacle is in the vehicle path.
Activation — Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short
distance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and
11
mph (0 and 18 km/h). The system can be
activated/deactivated via the "Settings" menu of
the Uconnect system. If the ParkSense System is
deactivated via the ParkSense Hard switch then
the Side Distance Warning system will
automatically be deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
featur
e:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the
case of a failure of the Side Distance Warning
system sensors. Free the bumpers of any
obstacles, ensure that the front and rear bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
“SDW Not Available” — This message is displayed
if the Side Distance Warning system is not
available. The failed operation of the system might
be due to the insufficient voltage from the battery
or other failures on the electrical system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the electrical system checked.
Operation With A Trailer
The system is automatically deactivated when the
trailer's electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow
hook socket. The rear sensors are automatically
reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is
removed.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance
of the Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the message to
appear in the instrument cluster display will
read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inch
es
(
3
0
c
m
)
12–65 inches
(30–60
cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Con
tinuous
Audible chime
i
ncrea
ses as
the objects
within the
vehicle’s path
get close to
the vehicle
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the
parking sensors. Before using the ParkSense
system, it is recommended to remove the
removable tow hook ball assembly and any
attachments from the vehicle when it is not
used for towing operations. If you wish to leave
the tow hook fitted when not towing a trailer,
contact your authorized dealer for the Park
-
Sense system operations update because the
tow hook
could be detected as an obstacle by
the sensors.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel,
perpendicular, and parallel park exit maneuvers by
identifying a proper parking space, providing
audible/visual instructions, and controlling the
steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the
driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assemb
ly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom
-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulde
r when using ParkSense.
4
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking
space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger
side), as well as exiting a parallel parking space.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding
objects, and must intervene as required.
The system is designed to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the
driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain,
snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space
that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic
sensor waves).
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSe
nse Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system (LED
turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automa
tically for any of the following conditions:
Parking maneuver is complete
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the parking
space
Steering wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space
ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist switch is
pushed
Driver's door is opened
Rear liftgate is opened
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Brake
System intervention
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow
a maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within the maximum amount of shifts, the system
will cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate
and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
Ignition is in the RUN position.
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-
vated.
Driver's door is closed.
Rear liftgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph
(25 km/h), the instrument cluster display
will i
nstruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle
is driven above approximately 18
mph (30 km/h),
the system will cancel. The driver must then reac
-
tivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch.
The outer surface and the underside of the front
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park A
ssist switch will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions
are not present.
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press
or to Switch Maneuver” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. You may
select perpendicular, parallel, or parallel park exit.
The arrow buttons on the left side of the steering
wheel can be used to switch parking maneuvers.
Active ParkSense Searching
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of the
vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free
and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
be overhanging or protruding into the parking
space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The system will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple
available parking spaces, the system will only
indicate the last detected parking space for the
maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found,
and th
e vehicle is not in position, you will be
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle
for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence
(depending on the type of maneuver being
performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instru
cted to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel. When
the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still
removed from the steering wheel), you will be
instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steeri
ng to complete before then instructing to
check surroundings and move backward.
4
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear shifts
(DRIVE
and REVERSE), with hands off of the
steering wheel, before instructing the driver to
check surroundings and complete the parking
maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuv
er is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking position,
then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message
"Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position" will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the semi-automatic
parking maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to remove
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
should check their surroundings and begin to
back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active
steering guidance into the parking space.
The system will provide a warning to the driver
at 3
mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down.
The dr
iver is then responsible for completing the
maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver
for any reason, the driver must take control of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in
front of you, and be sure to check for pedes
-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
a
nd blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
(Continued)
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel
p
arkin
g spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the ParkSense
Active
Park Assist switch and then use the steering
wheel arrow buttons to select the Parallel Park Exit
feature. After the selection, the system activates
and instructs the driver through the instrument
cluster display about the operations that have to
be carried out to perform the maneuver correctly.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the right and left arrow buttons on the steering
wheel
to select between parallel or perpendicular
parking mode. Then use the direction indicators
(turn signals) to choose the direction that you want
to perform the maneuver.
During the maneuver, the system asks the driver to
shift
to REVERSE, and operate the turn signal in
the direction you want to exit. Let go of the steering
wheel and use the brake or accelerator pedals as
instructed, while the system handles the steering
automatically for exiting the parking space. If the
driver continues to carry out a voluntary or
involuntary action on the steering wheel during the
exit maneuver (touching or holding the steering
wheel to prevent its movement), the maneuver will
be interrupted.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly be discon
-
nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not use
d for towing. Failure to do so can result
in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to
the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize
every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING!
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in
order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system.
CAUTION!
4
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the
displa
y shows the message of a completed
maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the system
gives back the vehicle control to the driver.
Important Information
If the sensors undergo impact which alters their
position, the system operation could be greatly
affected.
The sensors reach top performance after the
vehicle has gone about 30 miles (50 km) due to
the dy
namic tire circumference calculations used
for parking.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors
must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud,
dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the
system not working properly. The ParkSense
system might not detect an obstacle behind or in
front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind or in
front of the fascia/bumper.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle (echo
noise) due to mechanical noises, for example
while washing the vehicle or in the case of rain,
strong wind, and hail.
The sensors may not detect objects of a particular
shape or made from particular materials (very
thin poles, trailer beams, panels, nets, bushes,
anti-parking posts, pavements, rubbish bins,
motor vehicles, etc.). Always take great care to
check that the vehicle and its path are actually
compatible with the parking place identified by
the system.
The use of wheels and tires that are different size
to the original equipment could affect the opera-
tion of the system.
The operation of the rear sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is
inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket, while
the front sensors stay active and can provide
acoustic and visual warnings. The rear sensors
are automatically reactivated when the trailer's
cable plug is removed.
In "Search in Progress" mode, the system could
incorrectly identify a parking place to carry out the
maneuver (e.g. by a junction, driveways, roads
crossing the direction of travel, etc.).
In the case of parking maneuvers on roads with
an incline, the performance of the system could
be inferior and it may deactivate.
If a parking maneuver is being carried out
between two parked vehicles alongside the pave-
ment, the system may cause the vehicle to mount
t
he pavement.
Some maneuvers at very tight bends might be
impossible to be carried out.
Take great care to ensure that conditions do not
change during the parking maneuver (e.g. if there
are persons and/or animals in the parking place,
moving vehicles, etc.) and intervene immediately
if necessary.
During parking maneuvers, pay attention to vehi-
cles approaching from the opposite direction.
Always
abide by the law and road regulations.
NOTE:
Correct system operation is not guaranteed if
snow chains or the spare tire are fitted.
The function only informs the driver about the
last appropriate parking place (parallel or
perpendicular) detected by the parking sensors.
Some messages displayed are accompanied by
acoustic warnings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180
km
/h). The LaneSense system uses a
f
or
w
a
r
d
looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the
steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within
the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to
unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSense
system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning
by appl
ying torque to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will
not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSen
se system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible warning to the driver when the driver’s
hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
center stack.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
La
neSense button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state
on or off from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
a
re gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is
solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
4
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the left
lane m
arking has been detected and the system
is ready to provide visual warnings in the instru
-
ment cluster display if an unintentional lane
depart
ure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes from white to
gray, and the LaneSense telltale changes from
solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached
(Flashing White To Gray Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavi
or for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected.
The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both
lane markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid white. The
LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the
lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane, the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes from white to
gray and the LaneSense telltale changes from
solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time,
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane, the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached
(Flash
ing White To Gray Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavi
or for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gr
ay when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is
solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the left
lane m
arking has been detected and the system
is ready to provide visual warnings in the instru
-
ment cluster display if an unintentional lane
depart
ure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/
off) and the LaneSense telltale changes from
solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached
(Flash
ing Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavi
or for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected.
The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both
lane markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
4
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/
off). The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane t
he steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached
(Flash
ing Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavi
or for a right lane departure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system
Ú page 133.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180
km
/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of your vehicle's rear
surroundings when the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a note to “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds, this note will disappear. The
camera is located above the rear license plate.
Parking Camera
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears
again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8
mph (13 km/h), the
vehicl
e is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, a
touchsc
reen "X" button is shown on the camera
image in order to disable the visualization earlier
than 10 seconds.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on t
he camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green
3 ft or greater
(1
m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
4
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The Capless Fuel system uses a flapper placed at
the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes
automatically upon insertion/extraction of the fuel
nozzle.
The Capless Fuel system is designed so that it
prevents the filling of an incorrect type of fuel.
Opening The Door
For filling, proceed as follows:
1. O
pen the door, by pushing and releasing on
the indentation point indicated by the arrow.
Fuel Filler Door
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
the n
ozzle opens and holds both flapper doors
while refueling.
Filler Pipe
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
4. Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10
seconds to allow the fuel to flow inside of the
tank.
5. Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then
close
the door.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up
Camera should only be used as a parking aid.
The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Back Up
Camera to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using the Rear Back Up Camera.
WARNING!
Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of the
filler neck other than what is provided on the
car.
The use of objects/plugs that are not compat-
ible with the vehicle may cause pressure
i
n
c
r
e
a
ses inside the tank, creating dangerous
conditions.
Do not approach the neck of the tank with
open flames or lit cigarettes; it is an extreme
fire hazard. Also, avoid close contact with the
filler pipe with your face; do not inhale harmful
vapors.
Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of
the pump fuel nozzle; it can be a possible risk
of fire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar
Ú page 322.
This label contains the month and year of
m
anufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on
this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of
manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and
front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
4
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverag
e, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 123.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fu
lly loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 123.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be installed
between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while
traveling.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded.
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
vehicle manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
a weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight-distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
4
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds t
o the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the tire and loading infor
-
mation placard for the maximum combined weight
of occup
ants and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended:
Engine Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
1.3L Turbo 2,000 lb (906 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire a
nd Loading Information placard
Ú page 322
.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing as
safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
(Continued)
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle
Ú page 329.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer Ú page 329.
For the proper tire replacement procedures
Ú page 329. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's
G
VWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance,
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis
-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure,
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the frame or hook retainers of the
vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. Always block or "chock"
the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
WARNING!
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The en
gine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50
mph
(
8
0
k
m
/
h) and do not make starts at full
throttl
e. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have a collision.
4
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring (If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin
and se
ven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harnes
s.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicl
e but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations:
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
WARNING!
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under
heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing
e
xcessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate perfor
-
mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle
speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle
speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10
mph (16 km/h),
d
i
s
e
n
g
age until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND
A
NOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state
a
n
d
p
r
ovincial Highway Safety offices for addi-
tional details.
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to
avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engage
-
ment. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or
disabl
ed via the customer programmable
features in the Uconnect Settings.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
w
h
e
e
l
s
are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the
ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the
transmission in PARK. Turn the engine off.
Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
Turn the ignition to the RUN position, but do not
start the engine.
Towing
Conditi
on
Wheels
Off Th
e
Ground
Front-
Wheel
D
rive
(FWD)
Four-
Wheel
Drive
(4WD)
Flat Tow NONE
NOT
ALLOWED
NO
T
ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR
NOT
ALLOWED
NO
T
ALLOWED
FRONT OK
NOT
ALLOWED
On
Trailer ALL
BEST
METHOD
OK
4
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
Press and hold the brake pedal.
Release the EPB.
Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake
pedal.
Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
g
round
, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give
them a higher center of gravity than conventional
passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for cornering at
the same speeds as conventional passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power
Ú page 91. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or
s
and w
here additional low speed pulling power is
needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25
mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that
must be considered before entering the water:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centim
eters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
If you must drive through water, try to determine
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while being
towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before
entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
the depth and the bottom condition (and location
of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed
less than 5
mph (8 km/h) in deep water to
minimi
ze wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off
) avoid crossing until the water level recedes
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9
inches
(22 cm
). The flowing water can erode the
streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream
of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water — Trailhawk Only
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
1
9 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed
appropr
iately to minimize wave effects. Maximum
speed in 19
inches (48 cm) of water is less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
v
ehicl
e fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission,
Power Transfer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to
ensure they have not been contaminated.
Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky, foamy
in appearance) should be flushed/changed as
soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD
system to the appropriate terrain mode, using
4WD Low if necessary
Ú page 91. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-r
evving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads
becaus
e engine braking may cause skidding and
loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditi
ons at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission
to a lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD
Low. Use first gear and 4WD Low for very steep
hills.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing
a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the
engine and shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the
hill allowing the compression braking of the engine
to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are
required to control vehicle speed, apply them
lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill -
drive
straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest
of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and
right. This may provide a fresh “bite” into the
surface and will usually provide traction to
complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD
System to 4WD Low range or select Hill Descent
Control (if equipped)
Ú page 222 . Let the vehicle
go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning
agains
t engine compression drag. This will permit
you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
brakin
g can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by
downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may
result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always
back straight down a hill in REVERSE gear
carefully. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL
using only the brake.
4
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steeri
ng, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate
-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wh
eels of it will correct the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
133
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
requir
e software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your ve
hicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
5
134 MULTIMEDIA
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or cert
ain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On
Faceplate And Buttons On Touchscreen
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button
on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button at
a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
MULTIMEDIA 135
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and the
Instru
ment Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and
Español.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
a
ccess
this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
5
136 MULTIMEDIA
Units
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting will allow you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in
the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting will change the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi,
kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement
independently.
MULTIMEDIA 137
Voice
Clock & Date
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
The “B
rief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system.
The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
will c
ontrol the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
m
ust b
e off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
5
138 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Driving Assistance
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
this s
etting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-”
setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you
can scroll through the available days, months, or years.
Setting Name Description
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options
will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder,
select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW)
alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 139
Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+)
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning-Plus system on or off. The
“Off” setting will deactivate the FCW+ system. The “Warning Only” setting will
provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning +
Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply brake
pressure when a collision is detected.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide
lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and
“Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Side Distance Warning
This setting will adjust the warning for side distance. The available options are
“Off”,
“Sound Only”, and “Sound & Display”.
Side Distance Warning Volume
This setting will adjust the volume for side distance warning. The available
options
are “Low”, “Med”, and “High”.
Drowsy Driver Alert
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any
c
hange
s, indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting will adjust the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
availa
ble settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Setting Name Description
5
140 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
Brakes
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the
vehicle is turned on and off. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is
selected, a pop-up will display with “Yes” and “No” options.
MULTIMEDIA 141
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of
the ve
hicle purchased.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Interior Ambient Lighting
This setting will allow you to adjust the interior ambient lighting using “+” and
“-” opt
ions.
Headlight Sensitivity
This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights dependent on
the am
ount of visible light. The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external
light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at
sunset, the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). The available
levels are “Level 1: Minimum Sensitivity”, “Level 2: Medium Sensitivity”, and
“Level 3: Maximum Sensitivity”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
t
o shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or
the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn
on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Flash Lights with Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
5
142 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks This setting will automatically lock your doors.
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button
is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. Th
e “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
key fob.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 143
Seats & Comfort
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start
has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats (if
equipp
ed) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is remote
started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort
systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems
when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings
will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after
vehicl
e shut off. The available options are “0 sec” or “20
min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will shut the radio off when the door is opened. The available
s
ettin
gs are “On” and “Off”.
5
144 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
and le
ft/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started.
The av
ailable settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the
system resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
MULTIMEDIA 145
Phone/Bluetooth®
SiriusXM® Setup
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Displa
y.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto
R
eply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom
Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio. These settings can be used
t
o skip
specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
music
channel using one of the 12 presets.
5
146 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
Channel Skip
This setting will allow you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list
will d
isplay of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is
a separate subscription.
Setting Name Description
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
defaul
t.
Restore Apps This setting will reset the apps to their factory default.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data f
rom the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
MULTIMEDIA 147
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
1 — Radio/Media Button 5 — Navigation Button (if equipped)
2 — Climate Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Apps Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Controls Button
5
148 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode an
d access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 150.
Phone
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the
h
ands-free phone system Ú page 164.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 133.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
s
elect
ion on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system
off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off
button
on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to
reset
the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from
freezing or being stuck.
Controls — If Equipped
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats
and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Mobile apps.
MULTIMEDIA 149
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your
preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Drag &
Drop
1. P
ress the Apps butt
on to open the App
screen.
2. P
ress and hold, then drag the selected app to
replace an existing shortcut in the main menu
bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing s
o can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
c
ontrol
functions Ú page 44.
Nav (Navigation) — If Equipped
Press the Nav button to enter Navigation Mode and use the system’s built-in
Naviga
tion software Ú page 180.
Feature Description
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
150 MULTIMEDIA
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system
.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
depend
ent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu
-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufa
cturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 349.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three
and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push
button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch
between the various modes available (AM/
FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push b
utton in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will Seek Down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
the current track.
MULTIMEDIA 151
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button or
M
e
d
i
a button on the
touchscreen to enter the Radio Mode. The
different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then
be selected by pressing the corresponding button
in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on
a
nd off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob
clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
be set
at the same volume level as last played.
If equipped, your radio has the ability to perform a
forced reset. This can be achieved by pushing and
holding the VOLUME & On/Off control knob for
10 seconds. This feature is helpful if the radio
freeze
s or crashes.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the
system
.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockw
ise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by
pressi
ng the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pushing the left steering wheel
audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press
and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
D
own fu
nction, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band two
times, the radio will stop at the station where it
began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press
and hold, and then release the Seek Up
or Seek Down button to advance the radio
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — Map Button
3 — View Next Preset Radio Station
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse Button
6 — Source Select (if equipped with 4C/4C NAV)/
R
adio B
ands
7 — Seek Down
8 — Tune Button
9 — Seek Up
10 — HD Radio™ (if equipped)
11 — Audio Settings
12 — Bottom Menu Bar
5
152 MULTIMEDIA
through the available stations or channels at a
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
r
adio s
creen to directly tune to a desired radio
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchsc
reen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
p
ress
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
the system will automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
wait for the beep to say a command. See the
f
ollowi
ng example:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At an
y time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button
and say “
Help”. The system
provides you with a list of commands.
HD Radio™ — If Equipped
HD Radio™ technology is the digital evolution of
analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special
receiver, which allows it to receive digital
broadcasts (where available) in addition to the
analog broadcasts. Digital broadcasts provide free,
crystal clear audio with no static or distortion.
For more information and a guide to available
stations and programming, please visit
hdradio.com.
To begin using HD Radio™:
1. P
ress the Media Button.
2. S
elect AM or FM tab.
3
.
S
e
l
ect the HD button.
When
HD Radio™ reception is enabled and a
station
with HD Radio™ broadcasts is playing, the
following indicators may appear on the screen:
HD Radio™ Logo: This indicator will display in
gray when a digital station is being acquired and
will appear in orange and white when digital
audio is playing. When this logo is available, you
will also see Station Call Sign (e.g. WNIC), Title
and Artist fields on screen.
Multicast Indicator (1 2 3...): These numbers will
appear if the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts. Press the Seek Up or Down button
repeatedly to access the other digital broad
-
casts. The numbers that are highlighted signify
a
vailable digital channels where new/different
content is available. HD1 will signify the main
programming service and is available in analog
and digital broadcasts. Any additional multicast
stations (HD2–HD8) are only broadcast digi
-
tally.
Album Art/Station Logo: Some HD Radio™
stations broadcast station logos and album art
associated with the song being played as part of
the HD Radio™ broadcast service. Station logo
art is stored in the radio and may take up to five
minutes to learn for each station that supports
station logo service. Album art is broadcast at
the beginning of songs. If tuning into the middle
of a song, the art may not be available.
MULTIMEDIA 153
When HD Radio™ broadcasts are active, you can
access the following functions:
Seek Up And Down: Press to seek to the next
strong radio station. If the current station has
multiple digital broadcasts, the multicast indi
-
cator numbers will display. Press “Seek” repeat-
edly to advance through all available
b
roadcasts. If you are on the last multicast
channel, press “Seek Up” to advance to the next
strong station.
Saving A Multicast Station As A Preset: When
the channel is active on-screen, press and hold
a Preset button; it will save the station to the
available slot. When recalling an HD2, HD3, etc.
memory preset, there will be a momentary mute
before the digital audio is played as the system
acquires the digital signal. If you have turned
this feature off, this will automatically turn on
HD Radio™ broadcasts and will tune to the
selected frequency. As with any saved radio
station, you will not be able to access the saved
station if your vehicle is outside the station’s
reception area.
“LIVE” Ballgame Mode Broadcasts: If a station
has a live broadcast (such as a baseball game),
“LIVE” may appear on screen beside the multi
-
cast numbers. These are analog broadcasts
with d
igital components (i.e. artist, title). If HD1
is in a live broadcast mode, the HD Radio™ logo
will be gray. You will hear analog audio; the user
will still be able to tune to the multicast chan
-
nels.
Reception Area:
If you are listening to a multicast
(HD2, HD3, etc.) station and you are on the fringe
of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1,
the system will simply switch to the analog
broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible
multic
ast (HD2, HD3, etc.) channels, the station
will mute and stay muted unless it is able to
connect to the digital signal again. While in this
state, the text “buffering” will appear for 30 sec-
onds. If it is not able to reconnect to the digital
signal, the screen will be cleared and “HD Radio™
Signal Unavailable” will appear in artist and title
field area.
Station Blending: When
an HD1 station is received,
the system will play the analog audio broadcast
from the station for a few seconds and then, if the
receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio™
station, it will transition to play the digital audio
broadcast. Depending on the station quality, you
may hear a slight sound change when the station
transitions from analog to the digital broadcast.
The shift from analog to digital or digital back to
analog sound is known as “blending”.
Station Issues: In order to provide the best
possible experience, a contact form has been
developed to report any station issues found while
listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio™
technology. Every station is independently owned
and operated. These stations are responsible for
ensuring all audio streams and data fields are
accurate. This form can be found at
https://
hdradio.com/stations/feedback/.
5
154 MULTIMEDIA
HD Radio™ Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. US and Foreign Patents. For patents, see http://dts.com/patents. HD
Radio™, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio™, and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States
and/or
other countries.
Troubleshooting
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time alignment — a user may hear a
short period of programming replayed or an echo,
stutter, or skip.
The radio station’s analog and digital volume is not
properl
y aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.
None. It is a radio broadcast issue. The user can
contact the station.
Sound fades, blending in and out.
Radio is shifting between analogue and digital
audio.
Reception issue: It may clear up as the vehicle
contin
ues to be driven. Turning off HD Radio™ can
force the radio to use analogue audio.
Audio mute condition when an HD2, HD3, etc.
multicast channel is playing.
The radio does not have access to digital signals at
the moment.
This is normal behavior. Wait until the digital signal
returns. If out of coverage area, seek a new station.
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2, HD3, etc.
multicast channel preset.
The digital multicast content is not available until
HD
R
a
d
i
o™ broadcast can be decoded and make
the audio available. This can take up to seven
seconds.
This is normal behavior. Wait until the audio is
a
v
a
i
l
a
ble again.
Text information does not match the present song
audio or no text information shown for the present
selected frequency.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified. Use the form at
https://hdradio.com/stations/feedback/
MULTIMEDIA 155
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Changing
To SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual
kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separa
tely after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
S
iriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipp
ed with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
have t
o change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
s
ubscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
radio does not have the necessary subscription,
the radio is able to receive the Preview channel
only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
s
ubscription, US residents visit
http://
www.siriusxm.com/getallaccess or call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/
or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located
at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
5
156 MULTIMEDIA
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display SiriusXM®
Satell
ite Radio
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to
22
minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk
r
adio.
Once the channel is switched, content in
replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The
Play/P
ause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will
display at the top of the screen, along with the
replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Traffic & Weather Button (if equipped)
7 — Audio Settings Button
MULTIMEDIA 157
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to
pause
the playing of live or rewound content at any
time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/
Play button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind
the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchsc
reen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
5
158 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
T
he Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored
in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
the touchscreen.
TRAFFIC & WEATHER — AVAILABLE ON THE 4C
NAV (IF EQUIPPED)
Press the Traffic & Weather button on the
touchscreen to tune to a SiriusXM® Traffic and
Weather channel. To set a Traffic & Weather alert
for any one of the cities in the Jump Browse list,
see “Browse in SXM”.
If the Traffic & Weather alert city is not set, you are
presen
ted with a pop-up to allow you to select the
favorite city using the Browse screen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Browse
Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit s
ubmenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When
p
ressing the All button, the following categories
become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any de
sired Genre by pressing the Genre List.
The radio tunes to a channel with the content in
the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at
the le
ft of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
MULTIMEDIA 159
button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
s
creen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
F
avorit
es list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen
. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
F
avorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
t
he Br
owse screen. This feature provides you with
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air
list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
to that channel.
Select Team — If
Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen
to act
ivate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen
league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen
. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Al
ert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
upon score update” or both when one or more of
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the be
ginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
Saving Presets To A Driver Memory
Profile — If Equipped
After setting/changing the desired radio presets,
your updates will be saved under the current active
profile automatically. Seat alignment will not be
saved automatically. For more information, refer to
“Driver Memory Settings” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” in the Owner’s Manual.
5
160 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Radio
Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as
a pres
et, press and hold the numbered button on
the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio M
odes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You
can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provide
s a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll
t
he preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL
knob or by pressing the Up or Down Arrow key,
located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button or the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen
by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
p
ressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the
Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio button.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the
X button.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
MULTIMEDIA 161
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the fr
ont speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
d
ecrea
se each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, or
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
as in
a movie theatre or home theatre system.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
A
UX inp
ut audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
Off to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
5
162 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Operating Media
Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
When available, you can select the Browse button
on the touchscreen to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info
b
u
t
t
on
on the touchscreen for artist information on
the current song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into
t
h
e
U
S
B port, by selecting the USB button on the
left side of the touchscreen, or by selecting the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
is ent
ered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
containing music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired
to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
button
on the left side of the touchscreen or under
the Source Select/Select Source button (if
equipped).
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Source
Select
1
— Repeat
2 — Source Select (if equipped 4C/4C NAV)
3 — Track Time
4 — Info
5 — Shuffle
6 — Browse
7 — Tracks Browse
MULTIMEDIA 163
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device
using a cable with a 3.5
mm audio jack into
t
h
e
A
U
X port, or by pressing the AUX button on the
left side of the touchscreen, or under the Source
Select button (if equipped).
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and
begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
p
laylists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
provided by the radio; use the device controls
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button,
VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
t
ouchsc
reen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down button
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or to return to the beginning
of the previous selection if the USB device is within
the first three seconds of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
Up but
ton on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second
of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchsc
reen to display the browse window. In USB
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays
a list of ways you can browse through the contents
of the USB device. If supported by the device, you
can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song,
etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen
on the left side of the screen. The center of the
browse window shows items and their
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by
pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The
TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchsc
reen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the tou
chscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchsc
reen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
t
ouchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted
when active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is
active. Press the Repeat button again to enter
Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the
Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchsc
reen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
5
164 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio b
utton Ú page 151.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the
t
ouchsc
reen to display the current track
information. Press the Info or X button on the
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the
touchsc
reen to display a pop-up with the Song List.
The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When in
the Tracks List screen you can rotate the TUNE/
SCROLL knob to highlight a track (indicated by the
line above and below the track name) and then
push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing
that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
support
s this feature, press the Tracks button on
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while
the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
c
ommands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist:
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
Did You Know: Press
the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song, and genre information
is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call
logs.
MULTIMEDIA 165
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetoot
h® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
your ve
hicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-38
7-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as you
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
the system's microphone for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetoot
h® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the
Uconnect system. Up to 10
mobile phones or audio
device
s are allowed to be linked to the system.
Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one
audio device can be used with the system at a
time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel
is used to get into the Phone Mode and
m
ake c
alls, show recent, incoming or
outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc.
When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in”
a
nd wh
en you are already in a call or
want to make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
Voice Command features if your vehicle is
equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith
mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
166 MULTIMEDIA
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
the following compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command form
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
system filters out certain non-word utterances and
sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call”
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
the topic or context and provides the associated
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system
requires more information from the user, it
will ask a question to which the user can respond
without pushing the Voice Command button on the
steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
push t
he Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect
P
hone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone
pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
refere
nce your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
MULTIMEDIA 167
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. P
lace the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluet
ooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec
-
tions.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up
on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing
or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices
button and then press the Paired Phones
button
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the connec
-
tion request.
6. U
connect Phone will display an in-progress
scree
n while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone p
riority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up
on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring
up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system
may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete
5
168 MULTIMEDIA
the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchs
creen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchs
creen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the
system
, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within
range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device
priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to bring
up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular
phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the
Phone Pairing
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices
button and then press the Paired Phones or
Audio Sources button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
parti
cular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices
button and then press Paired Phones or Audio
Sources button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
of the
device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
MULTIMEDIA 169
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred “Connected
Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchs
creen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. Your
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook,
Ú page 173.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetoot
h® wireless phone connection is made
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the
Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button
next to the selected number to display the
option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove
an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
to remove from your favorites. This will bring
up the options for that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
5
170 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that
you have.
Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call
by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call
Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features:
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. P
ress the Dial/Keypad button on the
t
ou
c
h
s
creen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. U
se the numbered buttons on the
t
ou
c
h
s
creens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls
button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation. For
example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
1 — Answer
2 — Ignore/Decline
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
MULTIMEDIA 171
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — NO
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Phone button on the steering
wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
curren
t call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system
in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
messag
e, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160
characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchsc
reen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
172 MULTIMEDIA
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the keypad (if supported by your
mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following
b
e
e
p
,
say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until
the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to
press the Transfer button on the touchscreen
when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
MULTIMEDIA 173
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your Fa
vorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when t
he entries are not similar. You can say “O”
(letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combina
tions is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudnes
s to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowerin
g the in-vehicle audio volume.
PHONE VOICE COMMANDS
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
say a command. See the following examples:
“
Call John Smith”
“
Dial 123 456 7890”
“
Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “
Call”, th
en
pronounce the name
exactl
y as it appears in your
phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “
Call John Smith work”.
VOICE TEXT REPLY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and
say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming
tex
t message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been
read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages
and follow the system prompts.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffi
c.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll
be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I wi
ll be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
5
174 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table.
Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
Did You Know: Your m
obile phone must have the
full implementation of the
Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
i
ncoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice
Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
text message.
SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
your voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnec
t Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system
Ú page 349.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your
U
connect system, and your
Android™ 6.0 or higher powered
smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your
smartphone and a number of its apps onto the
touchscreen radio display. Android Auto™ brings
you useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with speech
technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio
display’s touchscreen to control many of your
apps. To use Android Auto™, perform the following
procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
I’ll call you
later.
I
need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
MULTIMEDIA 175
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your Android™-powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone
to one
of the media USB ports in your vehicle.
If the Android Auto™ app was not downloaded,
the first time you plug your device in the app
begins to download. Your vehicle should be in
PARK the first time you use the app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that
came w
ith your phone, as aftermarket cables may
not work.
Android Auto™
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area w
ith cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen.
Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized,
the P
hone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
changes to the Android Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
compati
ble device is connected. You can also
launch it by pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
The automatic launching of Android Auto™ can be
deacti
vated through the Smartphone Projection
Manager setting
Ú page 178.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnec
t system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for
music
Hands-free calling and texting for communica-
tion
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel until the
beep or
tap the Microphone icon to ask
Google to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access other
navigation apps.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the
built-
in Uconnect Navigation system (if equipped)
will launch instead of Android Auto™ Google
Maps™.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
NOTE:
A pop-up also appears, asking if you’d like to
switch
, if Android Auto™ is currently in use and you
attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route.
Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type to the
newly used method of navigation and a route is
planned for the new destination. If “No” is
selected, the navigation type remains unchanged.
For further information, refer to www.android.com/
auto/ (US) or https://www.android.com/intl/
en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Android Auto™ Icon
5
176 MULTIMEDIA
For further information on the navigation function,
please refer to https://support.google.com/
android or https://support.google.com/
androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and
stream your favorite music with apps like
YouTube
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify.
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you
can stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up
on your
smartphone prior to using Android Auto™
for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through
Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
system’s media screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push and
hold the VR button on the steering wheel
t
o
a
c
t
i
vate voice recognition specific to
Android Auto™. This allows you to send
and reply to text messages, have incoming text
messages read out loud, and place and receive
hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible
apps that are available to use with Android Auto™,
every time it is launched. You must have the
compatible app downloaded, and you must be
signed in to the app through your mobile device for
it to work with Android Auto™.
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to
see the latest list of available apps for Android
Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with its best-in-class speech technology
through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project
your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto™ icon that replaces your Phone icon
on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel,
or press and hold the Microphone icon within
Android Auto™, to activate its VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll
need an Android™ phone running Android™ 6.0
or higher, an active data plan, and the Android
Auto™ app.
To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car
display, you need a compatible Android™ smart-
phone with an active data plan. You can check
w
hich smartphones are compatible at g.co/
androidauto/requirements.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with
A
pple CarPlay®, the smarter,
more secure way to use your
iPhone® in the car, and stay
focused on the road. Use your
MULTIMEDIA 177
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs
and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access
to Apple Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using
iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings,
ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for the very first
connection only, and then use the following
procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB p
orts in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable
that c
ame with your phone, as aftermarket cables
may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized,
the P
hone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
changes to the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You
can al
so launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay®
icon on the touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay®
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data i
s turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage
is shown on the left side of the radio screen. Data
plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnec
t system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the
VR button on the steering wheel to
activa
te a Siri voice recognition session.
You can also press and hold the Home
button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to Siri.
This allows you to make calls or listen to voicemail
as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steeri
ng wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not function
with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all
your artists, playlists, and music from
i
T
u
n
e
s
® or any third party application
installed on your device. Using your
iPhone® data plan, you can also use select third
party audio apps including music, news, sports,
podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recogni
tion session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply to
text messages. Siri can also read incoming text
messages, but drivers will not be able to read
messages, as everything is done via voice.
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon
5
178 MULTIMEDIA
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel until the beep or tap the
Microph
one icon to ask Apple® Siri to
take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps.
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the
built-
in Uconnect Navigation system (if equipped)
will launch instead of Apple CarPlay® Apple®
Maps.
NOTE:
A pop-up also appears, asking if you’d like to
switch
, if an Apple CarPlay® navigation is currently
in use and you attempt to launch a built-in
Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” switches the navi
-
gation type to the newly used method of navigation
a
nd a route is planned for the new destination. If
“No” is selected, the navigation type remains
unchanged.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps
that are available to use, every time it is launched.
You must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through your
mobile device for it to work with Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US)
or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/
(Canada) to see the latest list of available apps for
A
pple
CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile
phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region and/
or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of
its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect
your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable,
and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to
begin Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to
use a list of your iPhone® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone®
is a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use
and privacy statements apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Smartphone Device Mirroring — If Equipped
Once downloaded or activated, Android Auto™ and
A
p
p
l
e
CarPlay® will automatically start when your
smartphone is plugged into a USB port. This
function can be activated/deactivated through the
Smartphone Projection Manager.
Smartphone Projection Manager
MULTIMEDIA 179
Smartphone Device Mirroring
To activate/deactivate this feature, connect your
smartphone with the manufacturer’s USB cable to
the vehicle’s USB ports.
1. Press the Phone/Bluetooth® button in the
Setti
ngs menu, or press the Apps button.
2. Press “Smartphone Projection Manager”.
3. The setting, “Smartphone Device Mirroring”,
will
display with a check mark. To deactivate
Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® for all
devices, press the check box. To reactivate
Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® for all
devices, press the check box again until a
check mark appears.
Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® can also be
activa
ted/deactivated on specific devices.
1. In “Smartphone Projection Manager”, select
the name of the device you would like to
activate/deactivate Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay®.
2. The setting, “Enable Android Auto™” or
“Enable Apple CarPlay®”, will display
depending on your smartphone. Press the
check box to deactivate these features. To
reactivate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®,
press the check box until a check mark
appears.
Enable Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto™
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetoot
h® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any setup
required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth®
is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Android
Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
connections to function. The connected device is
unavailable to other devices when connected
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System
— If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to
the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android
Auto™/Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will
be used to place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another
device can also be paired to the Uconnect system,
via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so the
passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
launch
ed from the front and center console USB
ports.
5
180 MULTIMEDIA
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED
(UCONNECT 4C NAV ONLY)
OPERATING NAVIGATION
Navigation Icon
To access the Navigation system, press the Nav
button on the touchscreen.
Press “Where To?” to find or route to a destina-
tion.
Press “View Map” to view the map.
Press “Home” to navigate to a preset home
address. If not already set, the system will
prompt you to add a home address.
Press “Work” to navigate to a preset work
address. If not already set, the system will
prompt you to add a work address.
Press “Information” to view Traffic, Where
Am I?, and Country Info.
Press “Emergency” to search for Hospitals, and
Police and Fire Stations near your current loca-
tion. You can also display your current location
a
nd save any Emergency facility location to your
Favorites.
Press the search bar at the top of the screen to
search for a specific address to route to.
Press “Route Options” and select from a list of
options to alter your route such as “Express
-
ways”, “Toll Roads”, “Ferries”, “Carpool Lanes”,
and more.
NOTE:
During route guidance, at any time you can return
to the
Navigation Main Menu by selecting Menu.
WHERE TO?
Where To? — Main Menu
Where To? Button
MULTIMEDIA 181
From the Nav Main Menu, press the Where To? button and select one of the following methods to program a route guidance.
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen option for further information.
Search All Press this button to search all “Where To?” categories for a location.
Address Press this button to search by a street address or a street name with house number.
Recent Press this button to access previously routed addresses or locations.
Favorites Press this button to access previously saved addresses or locations.
POI (Point of Interest)
Press this button when you want to route to a point of interest. The POI database
a
llows
you to select a destination from a list of locations and public places, or points
of interest.
Trips Press this button to program a new trip or recall a saved trip.
Intersection Press this button to enter in two street names as a destination.
5
182 MULTIMEDIA
Point on Map
Press this button to select a destination directly from the Map screen. By selecting a
street
segment or icon, you can quickly enter a destination without the need to input
the city name or street.
Home Press this button to program or confirm a route to the saved home address.
Work Press this button to program or confirm a route to the saved work address.
City Center
Press this button to route to a particular city. The Navigation system will calculate a
route w
ith the destination at the center of the city.
Closest Cities
Press this button to route to a nearby city. The screen will display an alphabetical
listin
g of nearby cities. The Navigation system will calculate a route with the
destination at the center of the nearby city.
Phone Number Press this button to route to a location or point of interest by the phone number.
Geo-Coordinates
Press this button to route to a Geo-Coordinate. A Geo-Coordinate is a coordinate
used i
n geography. You can determine a Geo-Coordinate with the help of a handheld
GPS receiver, a map, or the Navigation system.
Trails
Press the Trails button and select the option to start trail recording to track the route
you are
driving. Select the option to “stop trail recording” to end tracking. This gives
you a point of reference for a particular route if needed.
Edit Where To
Press this button and select which “Where To?” categories you would like to appear
in the
“Where To?” menu, and which ones you don’t.
MULTIMEDIA 183
Where To? — Search All, Address, Recent,
And Favorite Destinations
SEARCH ALL
1. Press the Search All button.
2. Enter the location name, street address, city,
etc.,
you wish to search for, to search all
“Where To?” categories for the entered
location, and press “OK”.
Search
3. Select the desired location from the list of
locat
ions that appears. Once the correct
location has been selected, you will be asked
to confirm your route by pressing “Route To”.
4. Press the GO! button on the touchscreen to
begin your route.
ADDRESS
1. Press the Address button.
2. Press “Spell City” or “Spell Street” to begin
enter
ing the address of your destination.
Enter Address
If you press “Spell City”, you will have to enter
and se
lect/press the desired city name, fol-
lowed by the desired street name, and then
t
he house number.
If you press “Spell Street”, you will have to en-
ter and select/press the desired street name
in the
correct city, and then you will have to en-
ter the house number.
Select Street
To change the state and/or country, press the
s
tate
and/or country button and follow the
prompts to change the state and/or country.
Once the correct city, street and number have
been e
ntered, you will be asked to confirm
your route by pressing “Route To”.
3. Press the GO! button to confirm your
desti
nation and begin your route.
5
184 MULTIMEDIA
RECENT
1. Press the Recent button.
2. Press the button with the name of the desired
desti
nation.
To display the options for a destination from
the list, press the Gear icon, which opens a
pop-up menu with the options for that destina
-
tion.
Gear Icon
To delete a destination from the list, press “De-
lete” in that pop-up menu.
The following options are available for each
d
estin
ation:
Manage Destinations
Edit Name
Phone Number
Move Up
Move Down
Place Pin (saves the spot on the list)
Delete
3. Select “Route To” to confirm your route.
4. P
res
s “GO!” to confirm your destination, and
b
e
g
i
n
your route.
If you are currently on a route guidance and you
select
“Recent”, the system will ask you to choose
one of the following:
“Cancel Previous Route”
“Add to Current Route”
Within “Add to Current Route”, you can add the
d
e
s
t
i
n
ation to your current route or set it as the
final destination.
NOTE:
You can press the Back Arrow button to return to
the pr
evious screen or the X button to exit.
FAVORITE DESTINATIONS
1. Press the Favorites button.
2. T
o save a favorite destination, press the Add
F
a
v
or
i
te button and follow the steps to route a
destination.
3. To delete a destination from the list, press the
Gear
icon next to the destination and select
“Delete” in the pop-up menu on the
touchscreen.
4. Press the button with the name of the desired
favorite destination and confirm the route with
“Route To”. Press “GO!” to confirm the
destination, and start the route guidance.
MULTIMEDIA 185
5. To display the options for a favorite
destination, press the Options icon that looks
like a gear.
The following options are available for each fa-
vorite destination:
Edit Name
Phone Number
Move Up
Move Down
Delete
Where To? — Point of Interest
To enter a destination by Point of Interest (POI),
press the Where To? button from the Nav Main
Menu, then press the POI Categories button.
POI Categories Button
The Point of Interest database allows you to select
a dest
ination from a list of locations and public
places, or points of interest.
You have the following POIs to choose from:
You can also change your POI search area by
pressing any of the category buttons and pressing
the Along Route button to access the Search Area
option.
Search Area
You will have the following options to change your
search
area:
Around Here
In [...] (In a City or a Zip Code)
Along Route (only available during route guid-
ance)
Around Destination (only available during route
guidance)
Around Next Waypoint
Search By Name
POI Categories
Restaurant
Hotel/Motel
Gas Station
Rest Area
ATM/Bank
5
186 MULTIMEDIA
POI — SEARCH BY NAME
1. Press the Search by Name button.
A keyboard will appear on the screen. Type in
the PO
I that you want to search and press the
OK button to display available items.
2. Press the desired POI and press “Route To” to
confir
m the route.
3. Press the GO! button to confirm the
destination and begin the route.
POI — POI CATEGORIES
1. Press the POI Categories button.
You can search through the available POI cate-
gories to find your desired POI.
The available categories are:
List All POIs
Airport
ATM or Banking
Automotive
Coffee Shops
Community
Entertainment
Gas Stations
Highway Exit
Hospital
Hotels or Motels
Local Services
Medical
Parking
Parks and Recreation
Restaurants
Shopping
Travel and Transportation
Truck
2. S
elect a category and then select a
s
u
b
c
a
tegory if necessary. Press the ABC
button to activate a keyboard to search within
the POI categories.
ABC Keyboard
3. P
ress the desired POI and press “Route To” to
confir
m the route.
4. Press the GO! button to confirm the
destination and begin the route.
POI — RESTAURANT, HOTEL/MOTEL, GAS
STATIONS, REST AREA, AND ATM/BANKING
1. Press the corresponding button for the POI
category you would like to navigate to.
You can search for a POI by the following cate-
gories, which are button tabs at the top of the
screen
:
Name
Distance
ABC (Search)
POIs Around Here
MULTIMEDIA 187
2. Press the desired POI destination and press
“Route To” to confirm the route.
3. Press the GO! button to confirm the
destination and begin the route.
Where To? — Trips
1. Press the Trips button
2. T
o add a Trip, follow these steps:
a
.
P
r
e
ss the Create New Trip button.
b. Pre
ss the Destination button, and then
press
“Pick Destination”.
c. Press “Add Destination” or “Insert Final
Destination” to add waypoints and destina
-
tions to your trip.
d. Choose from the following options to add a
desti
nation:
• Address
• Recent
• P
oint
of Interest
•
Fa
v
or
i
tes
• Home
• I
n
tersection
•
Ge
o-
C
oor
dinates
• Point
on Map
• C
ity
Center
•
Cl
os
e
s
t Cities
• Phone
Number
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen option
for fur
ther information.
e. To save your Trip, you must press “Calculate
Route” and press “Save”.
f. Your new Trip will appear on the Trips list.
3. T
o route to a saved Trip, follow these steps:
a
.
P
r
e
ss the button with the name of the
desir
ed Trip and press the first destination
in the list.
b. Confirm the route by pressing “Route To”,
and t
hen press “GO!” to confirm the desti
-
nation and to start the route guidance.
4. To delete a Trip from the list, press the Gear
icon a
nd then select “Delete” from the pop-up
menu.
5. To display the options for a trip, press the Gear
icon.
6.
The following Options are available for each
trip:
Edit Name
Move Up
Move Down
Delete
Where To? — Point on Map And Intersection
POINT ON MAP
1. Press the Point On Map button.
2. U
se the touchscreen to drag over to the
d
e
s
i
r
ed destination, and press the
touchscreen to select a location.
Point On Map
3. To enter a destination by Point On Map, follow
these
steps:
a. Once your cross is where you want it, press
“Route To”, or select “Places Nearby” to
select a nearby destination.
b. Press “GO!” to confirm the destination and
begin
route guidance.
5
188 MULTIMEDIA
INTERSECTION
1. Press the Intersection button.
2. Press the Spell City, Spell Street, or Select
Countr
y button to enter the desired city, street
name, or country.
NOTE:
If the system automatically recognizes the city, or
street
, it will populate a list of recognized cities or
streets. If not, press the List button to select from
the available options.
Select Street
3. If “Spell Street” was selected, you must select
the c
orrect street. You will then be asked to
spell the intersecting street, and then the
desired city.
4. Press the Route To button to confirm your
route,
and then press “GO!” to confirm the
destination and begin your route.
Where To? — Home And Work
HOME
1. Press the Home button. If there is no Home
Address entered, press “Yes” to enter it now.
2. To enter your Home Address, choose one of
the following options:
Spell City
Spell Street
Select Country
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen option
for fur
ther information.
Once you have generated your Home Address,
you will be asked to Save it.
a. Press the Save Home button to confirm your
destination and begin the route to your
Home Address.
b. This address will be saved as your Home
Addre
ss, and it can be accessed by pressing
the Home button in the Where To? Menu.
3. To delete a saved Home location (or other
saved
locations), so you can save a new Home
location, follow these steps:
a. Press the Nav button, and in the “Where To”
scree
n, press “Edit Where To”.
b. Press the Home button.
c. Under the Manage screen, press the Reset
Location
button.
NOTE:
A confirmation screen will appear asking, “Are you
sure y
ou want to reset this location?”. Press
“Reset” to confirm the deletion and then set a new
Home location by following the previous instruc
-
tions.
WORK
1. Press the Work button. If there is no Work
Address entered, press “Yes” to enter it now.
2. To set your Work Address, choose one of the
following options:
Spell City
Spell Street
Select Country
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen option
for fur
ther information.
3. Once you have generated your Work Address,
you will be asked to Save it.
MULTIMEDIA 189
4. Press the Save Work button to confirm your
destination and begin the route to your Work
Address.
5. This address will be saved as your Work
Addre
ss, and it can be accessed by pressing
the Work button in the Where To? Menu.
Where To? — City Center And Closest Cities
CITY CENTER
1. Press the City Center button.
2. T
o enter a destination by City Center, follow
t
h
e
s
e
steps:
a. Enter the name of the City you would like to
route to.
Select City Or Zip Code
b. P
ress the desired city from the list.
c. Pre
ss the Route To button to confirm your
route,
and then press “GO!” to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
CLOSEST CITIES
1. Press the Closest Cities button.
2. Press the desired city from the list.
3. Pre
ss the Route To button to confirm your
route,
and then press “GO!” to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
Where To? — Phone, Geo-Coordinates, And
Trails
PHONE
1. Press the Phone Number button.
2. T
o enter a destination by Phone Number,
f
ol
l
ow
these steps:
a. Enter the Phone Number of the business
you would like to route to.
b. Press the desired destination from the list.
c. Press the Route To button to confirm your
route,
and then press “GO!” to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
GEO-COORDINATES
1. Press the Geo-Coordinates button.
2. Enter the Latitude by typing in the numbers.
Use t
he dial pad to select specific numbers in
the location shown.
Geo-Coordinates
3. Press the OK button.
4. Ent
er the Longitude by typing in the numbers.
Use t
he dial pad to select specific numbers in
the location shown.
5. Press “OK” to confirm the destination.
6. Pre
ss the Route To button to confirm your
route,
and then press “GO!” to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
5
190 MULTIMEDIA
TRAILS
1. Press the Trails button.
2. Press “Start Recording”.
Start
Recording Trails
3. When you want to end the recording of a route,
press
the Record button, and press “Yes” to
confirm.
The trip you recorded will be added to the Re-
cent Trails list.
Before Route Guidance
Before confirming the destination with the GO!
button, it is possible to select options different
from the standard route settings.
Route Options — Press the Route Options button
to display a list of options to alter your route. To
make a selection, press and release the desired
setting.
Route Options Button
Route Options
1 — Round Trip
2 — Expressways Allowed
3 — Toll Roads Allowed
4 — Ferries Allowed
5 — Carpool Lanes Allowed
6 — Car Shuttle Trains Allowed
MULTIMEDIA 191
Avoid — Press the Avoid button to choose road
types to avoid during your route. To make a
selection press and release the desired setting.
Avoid Button
Detour Types
NOTE:
Since toll roads, tunnels and ferries are built for
the pu
rpose of shortening travel distances,
avoiding these road types may increase distance
and travel time.
Accept — Press the Accept button to confirm
desired detoured route.
Save — Press the Save button to save the desti-
nation as a Trip.
Press the GO! button to confirm your destination
a
nd to start your route guidance.
VIEW MAP
View Map — Main Menu
Press the View Map button from the Nav Main
Menu to display a map of your current position.
View Map Button
With the map displayed you have the following
f
eatur
es available:
Menu
Press this button to return to the Nav Main Menu.
Zoom In +/Zoom Out –
Press the Zoom In (+) or Zoom Out (–) buttons to
c
hange
the zoom level. Roads with lower
functional classification are not shown in higher
zoom levels (e.g., residential streets,
lightly-traveled county roads).
Time of Arrival/Time to Destination/Distance (only
during
route guidance)
Press the button in the upper right area of the
screen to the display items available. Press the
desired option button:
Time of Arrival
Time to Destination
Distance
Turn List (only during route guidance)
Press the area in the upper center part of the
s
creen that displays your next turn to see a Turn
List for your current route.
Press a turn in the displayed Turn List for the
followin
g options:
Show on Map
Avoid Street
5
192 MULTIMEDIA
Options (only during route guidance)
Press the Options button to display the following
options.
Press the desired button:
2D North Up/Map View 2D/Map View 3D
Press this button to scroll between the three
viewin
g options.
Repeat Directions
Press this button to repeat the current voice
prompt.
Mute Guidance
Press this button to mute the voice prompts.
Stop Guidance
Press this button to stop route guidance.
Settings
Press this button to view all the available
s
e
t
t
i
n
gs Ú page 192.
View Map — Settings
With the Map displayed, press the button on the
bottom right of the map that has three horizontal
lines on it. Then press the Settings button.
View Map Settings Icon
View Map Settings Button
The following Map Settings are available:
Map Settings
Map Setup — Press this button to display items to
customize how your map is viewed
Ú
page 193.
Speed Limit — Press this button to turn on/off
speed limit warning announcements and to
enter a predefined speed limit for your route.
Guidance — Press this button to display items to
customize your route guidance
Ú page 196.
Traffic — Press this button to set how you
receive traffic information updates.
GPS (DMS) — Press this button to change the
GPS display. Press the desired button:
Decimal
Degrees-Minutes-Seconds (DMS)
Degrees-Minutes (DM)
MULTIMEDIA 193
Map Updates — Press the button to view map
updates for the Navigation system.
About — Press the button to view information
about the Navigation system.
SETTINGS — MAP SETUP
With the Map displayed, press the button in the
bottom right corner of the map that has three
horizontal bars on it, then press the Settings
button and then the Map Setup button.
Map Setup
The following Map Setup options are available:
Map Setup Options
Map View
Press this button to change how the Map View is displayed. Press the desired
button:
3D (Must Select 3D City Models Or 3D Landmarks For 3D Map View To
Display)
2D
2D North Up
Map Appearance Press this button to select different themes for your map.
Display Current Street
Press this button to turn on/off the current street display on the lower center
of the Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
Display Current City
Press this button to turn on/off the current city display in the lower right of the
Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing
the setting has been selected.
5
194 MULTIMEDIA
Destination Information
Press this button to change the Destination Information that is displayed in
the upper right corner of the Map View. Press the desired button:
Time of Arrival
Time to Destination
Distance
Auto Zoom
Press this button to change how the Auto Zoom feature adjusts the zoom level
during guidance in Map View. Press the desired button:
Far
Medium
Low
Off
Vehicle Icon
Press this button to change the Vehicle icon that is displayed while in Map
View. Press “Previous” or “Next” to view the available icons. Press the Back
button when you've made your selection.
Show POI Icons
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to show the selected Point of
Interest icons while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check
mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
POI Categories
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display the available Point of
Interest icons you would like displayed while in Map View. Press and release
the desired selection until a check mark appears, showing the setting has
been selected.
Traffic Incidents — If Equipped
Press the Traffic button within the Map Setup screen to show Traffic Message
C
hanne
l (TMC) Incidents while in Map View. Press and release the button until
a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
MULTIMEDIA 195
Speed And Flow
Press the Speed Limit button within the Map Setup screen to show the Speed
and Fl
ow of traffic while in Map View. Press and release the button until a
check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
3D City Models
Press the 3D City Models button within Map Setup screen to display 3D City
Models while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark
appears, showing the setting has been selected.
3D Landmarks
Press the 3D Landmarks within the Map Setup screen to display 3D
Landmarks while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check
mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Digital Terrain Model
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display the area’s terrain
w
hile in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
Park Areas
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display Park Areas while in
M
ap View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing
the setting has been selected.
Railroads
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display Railroad Tracks while
in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
City Areas
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display City Areas while in
Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing
the setting has been selected.
River Names
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display River Names while in
Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing
the setting has been selected.
5
196 MULTIMEDIA
SETTINGS — GUIDANCE
With the Map displayed, press the Options button, then press the Settings button and then the Guidance button. You can also access this menu by pressing the
Settings button in the lower right of the Nav Main Menu.
Guidance Button
The following Guidance options are available:
Play Voice Guidance
Press this button to enable Voice Guidance prompts during route guidance.
Press
and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting
has been selected.
Nav Guidance Volume Press the + or – buttons to adjust the Nav Guidance Volume.
Lane Recommendation
Press this button to enable Lane Recommendation during route guidance.
Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting
has been selected.
MULTIMEDIA 197
Junction View
Press this button to enable Junction View during route guidance. Press and
releas
e the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
TMC Route Mode — If Equipped
Press this button to change how the Traffic Message Channel (TMC) Route
Mode functions during route guidance. Select from:
Automatic
By Delay Time
Manual
Off
TMC Avoidance Types — If Equipped
Press this button to display the available Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
Avoidance Types you would like displayed while in route guidance. Press and
release the desired selection button until a check mark appears, showing the
setting has been selected.
Signposts
Press this button to display the Signposts types you would like displayed while
i
n rout
e guidance. Press and release the desired selection button until a
check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Route Progress Bar
Press this button to display the Route Progress Bar while in route guidance.
Press and release the selection button until a check mark appears, showing
the setting has been selected.
Route Options
Press this button to determine which road types are OK to travel on while in
route guidance. Press and release the desired selection button until a check
mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
5
198 MULTIMEDIA
Highway Mode
Press this button to activate Highway Mode. Selectable options are “On” and
“Off”.
Having this setting on will allow you to select the setting “Highway
Services”.
Offered Services
Press this button to display the available Offered Services types you would like
displayed while in route guidance. Press and release the desired selection
button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Available selections are “Gas Stations”, “Restaurants”, “Rest Area”, and “Auto
Services And Maintenance”.
Use Real Time Traffic
Press this button to display Real Time Traffic Updates while in route guidance.
Press and release the desired selection button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
Provide Detours on Traffic Events
Press this button to display Detours On Traffic Events while in route guidance.
Press and release the desired selection button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
Confirm Detours Manually
Press this button to make it mandatory for you to have to Confirm Detours
M
anually while in route guidance. Press and release the desired selection
button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Provide Detours That Save More Than X Min.
Press this button to allow the Navigation system to display the available
detours if they save you a predetermined amount of minutes, while in route
guidance. Press and release the desired plus or minus button until you have
selected the desired number of minutes saved, from five minutes to one hour
in increments of five minutes.
MULTIMEDIA 199
INFORMATION
Information Button
From the Nav Main Menu, press the Information button and select one of the following options to view additional information:
Traffic “Traffic” displays detailed traffic information.
Weather — If Equipped “Weather” displays detailed weather information about your current position.
Where Am I?
“Where Am I?” displays the address and Geo-Coordinates of your current location.
1. Press the Show GPS Info button to view the GPS information.
2. Pre
ss the Save button to save the location in your Favorites.
Countr
y Info
Select the desired country on the touchscreen. Information, such as average
s
peed
limits and specific phone number country codes, will be provided about the
selected country.
5
200 MULTIMEDIA
EMERGENCY
From the Nav Main Menu, press the Emergency
button and press one of the following options to
search and route to a specific location.
Emergency Button
Emergency Nearby Options
Press the “Where Am I?” button to display your
exact
current location.
Press the Save button to save your current location
in Favorites.
You can search for a Hospital, Police Department,
or Fire Department by the following categories,
which are button tabs at the top of the screen:
Name
Distance
ABC (Search)
NOTE:
In case of emergency, please contact the facility to
verify
their availability before proceeding.
Select the desired Hospital, Police Department,
or Fire Department and press “Route To” to
confirm your route, and then press “GO!” to
confirm the destination and begin route guid
-
ance.
MAP UPDATES
The map data available in your vehicle is the most
up-to-date information that was available when
your vehicle was built. Map data is updated
periodically as map information changes. Follow
the steps below if you wish to obtain an update for
your vehicle.
1. Please visit
chryslergroup.navigation.com
to
obtain your map update. At the top of the
page,
click the brand of your vehicle. Then, at
the drop down menu, select your vehicle
model and its model year. You will then be
directed to a page that will let you know if your
vehicle needs a map update or not.
2. Or, visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveU-
connect.ca (Canada) and follow these steps:
Under the “Help & Support” tab, select your
vehicle brand, model, and year. Then, click
“SYSTEM UPDATES.” Simply follow the
steps and place your order.
1 — Hospital
2 — Police
3 — Fire Department
MULTIMEDIA 201
3. Or, if you wish, you can also visit your dealer or
place a phone call to request your Map
Update. US/CAN General Consumer Support:
888-628-6277
FCA US LLC Dealer Garmin Support:
877-628-4480
FCA US LLC Consumer FreshMaps:
866-422-8171
SIRIUSXM® TRAVEL LINK
SiriusXM® Travel Link
In addition to delivering over 160 channels of the
best s
ports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM® offers premium
data services that work in conjunction with
compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM® Travel
Link brings a wealth of useful information into your
vehicle and right to your fingertips.
Weather — Check variety of local and national
weather information from radar maps to current
and five day forecast.
Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices
in your area and route to the station of your
choice.
Sports Scores — In-game and final scores plus
weekly schedules for your favorite team.
Movie Listings — Check local movie theaters and
listings in your area and route to the theater of
your choice.
SiriusXM® Travel Link feature is seamlessly
integr
ated into your vehicle, so you can stay in the
know while you’re on the road. A few minutes after
you start your vehicle, Travel Link information
arrives and updates in the background. You can
access the information whenever you like, with no
waiting.
To access SiriusXM® Travel Link, press the Apps
button
on the touchscreen, then the SiriusXM®
Travel Link button.
NOTE:
SiriusXM® Travel Link requires a subscription, sold
separa
tely after the trial subscription included with
your vehicle purchase.
SIRIUSXM® TRAFFIC PLUS
SiriusXM® Traffic Plus
Avoid traffic before you reach it. By enhancing your
vehicle's Navigation system with the ability to see
detailed traffic information, you can pinpoint traffic
incidents, determine average traffic speed and
estimate travel time along your route. Since the
5
202 MULTIMEDIA
service is integrated with a vehicle's Navigation
system, SiriusXM® Traffic Plus can help drivers
pick the fastest route based on traffic conditions.
1. Detailed information on traffic speed,
accid
ents, construction, and road closings.
2. Traffic information from multiple sources,
including police and emergency services,
cameras and road sensors.
3. Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
4. Vie
w conditions for points along your route and
beyond
.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS
button are connected vehicles. These buttons will
be located on either the rearview mirror or
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you have
a connected radio and can take advantage of the
many connected vehicle features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS
buttons
Ú page 268.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first need to
activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, trans-
mission and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 220.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveuco-
nnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call
1-877-324-9091
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in
the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline communications
networks. Depending on the type of device in your
vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or
3G or 4G (data) network compatible with your
device. SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the
continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto
Rico and Canada.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
MULTIMEDIA 203
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services are dependent upon an operative
telematics device, a cellular connection, naviga
-
tion map data, and GPS satellite signal recep-
tion, which can limit the ability to reach the
r
esponse center or reach emergency support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels,
weather, damage to the electrical system or
other important parts of your vehicle, network
congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third
parties or the government, Internet failure, and/
or the physical location of your vehicle, such as
in an underground parking structure or under a
bridge.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available
for all
models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote
start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by
using the Mobile App or your computer.
If equipped — Send & Go capability with the
Mobile App. Use the Mobile App to easily search,
map and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Mobile App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-t
o-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
Rearvi
ew Mirror Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for
contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care,
Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you
directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Activation — If Equipped
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™
in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehi
cle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list
of apps.
3.
For customers in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, ente
r your email ad-
dress to activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial*
period for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services starting on the date of vehicle purchase.
To get started with your trial, enrollment in
SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Mobile App
Once you have activated your services, you’re only
a few steps away from using connected services.
Download the Mobile App to your mobile device.
Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app and then set up a PIN.
5
204 MULTIMEDIA
For customers in the United States, visit
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/Register
button in the upper right-hand corner to register
y
our account online.
a. Click the Register button.
b. Select the correct country and email
addre
ss then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification to
confirm/verify your newly created account.
d. After clicking the email link, it will take you
to a website and prompt you to assign your
account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
websi
te will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your VIN.
For customers in Canada, register your account
via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu
bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from the
apps
list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
mation email will be sent to the provided
e
m
a
i
l
address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confir-
mation email. It may take a short time
before
remote services will be available, but
you will be able to log into the Mobile App
and the Owner’s Site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set up
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote
Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if
equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom menu
bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your Mobile Naviga
-
tion, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you
with all the information you need, all in one place.
Y
ou can
track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch
videos about your vehicle's features, and easily
access your manuals. It is also where you can
manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This
section will familiarize you with the key elements of
the website that will help you get the most of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign
In/Reg
ister button and enter your email address
and password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
button.
Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health
Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will then
prompt you to log in using your email address and
password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
G
u
a
r
d
i
an™ account, such as your contact infor-
mation, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN,
c
lick on the Edit/Edit Profile button to access
the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardi
an™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™
subscr
iption, press one of these icons and enter
your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN
to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock
doors or sound the horn and flash the lights.
MULTIMEDIA 205
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
Sirius
XM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail to
notify you of the event. To set up the notifications,
please follow these instructions:
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.m
opar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
a
nd the
n “Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™”
where
you can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can customize
the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call — If Equipped
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard
assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
w
ith a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
in the event of an emergency. When the
connection between the vehicle and the live agent
is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit
location information. In the event of a minor
collision, medical or any other emergency, press
the SOS button to be connected to a call center
agent who can send emergency assistance to your
vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
are de
pendent on an operational Uconnect
system, cellular network availability that is
compatible with the device in your vehicle, and
GPS network availability. Not all features of
SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at
all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light
will
turn green indicating a call has been
placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or overhead console or press the
Cancel button on the touchscreen within 10
seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through your mobile
device versus the hands-free system which
is not available due to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
Siriu
sXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is
made, the agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
Sirius
XM Guardian™ Customer Care center may be
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call, will NOT work without a network connection
compatible with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
5
206 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and
that tr
avel into Mexico and Canada may have
limited services. In particular, responses to SOS
calls or other emergency services may be
unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased
outside the United States and Canada are unable to
receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the
following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact
your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop SOS Call system operation. These include,
but are not limited to, the following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
(inclu
ding during or after an accident), the SOS Call
system, among other vehicle systems, will not
operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may pr
event your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid
interference that can cause the SOS Call
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip
-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data r
ecorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE MOBILE APPS
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED
SERVICES WILL OPERATE.
MULTIMEDIA 207
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an
accident, a live agent will contact you through the
Uconnect system and alert emergency services.
NOTE:
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is
requir
ed for this feature to function.
After a crash where the airbags deploy:
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an
agent
.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the
location of the emergency.
3. If needed, the agent will request the
assistance of emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The
agent will remain on the call until emergency
services arrive.
NOTE:
Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the
case of an emergency.
On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
members about the collision.
Agents can brief first responders of the situation
before they arrive on scene.
In the event vehicle occupants are unable to
speak, emergency services will be dispatched
based on the last known GPS coordinates.
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics
device, a cellular connection, navigation map
data, and GPS satellite reception, which can
limit the ability to reach the response center or
reach emergency support.
Terms of service of the Uconnect and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ subscriber agreement
apply. See terms of services for complete
service limitation.
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device. These
features include locking/unlocking, remote
starting, and activating the horn and lights of the
vehicle.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instru-
ment panel if a malfunction in any part of the
a
ir bag system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag
system may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not be able to send a
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu
-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
your ve
hicle immediately.
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services if needed.
If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe loca
-
tion.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING!
Lock
Press this button to
lock your vehicle.
Vehicle Start
Press this button to
start
your vehicle.
Horn & Lights
Press this button to
s
ound t
he horn and
activate your lights.
5
208 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and Mobile
App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Mobile App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on
your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s
Site
1. L
og on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are
provide
d on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered
into your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you
want to send the command to by clicking on its
image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to activate
that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
Guard
ian™ Security PIN (this is the same
four-digit code established when you activated
your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services).
Please enter your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you
know if the command was received by your
vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for ex
ample, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
if you are unable to lock your vehicle through
the Mobile App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guard
ian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote
Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility
to protect your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
y
ou
t
h
e
ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
Unlock
Press this button to
u
nlock
your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start
Press this button to
cancel
remote start.
MULTIMEDIA 209
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with
SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. If using
the Mobile App to command your vehicle, your
device must be compatible and be connected to
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data)
network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and
Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote
Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not
be processed if the vehicle is in motion, the igni
-
tion key is on or during an emergency call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via
your Ow
ner’s Site or through the Mobile App on
your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with
the ab
ility to start the engine on your vehicle
without the keys and from virtually any distance.
Once started, the preset climate controls in your
vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine
that has been started using Remote Vehicle
Start. After 15
minutes, if you have not entered
your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off
automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipp
ed with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up push notifications every time a
command
is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob
within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been armed
and not triggered since the last vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of
fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the
vehicle must be started at least once after
alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not
authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance.
5
210 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy p
arking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention
to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every
time a command is sent to turn on the horn and
lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to
be loud
and get noticed. Please keep in mind the
surroundings when using this feature. You are
responsible for compliance with local laws, rules
and ordinances in the location of your vehicle
when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Assist — If Equipped
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
connect
ed services feature may contain an ASSIST
button in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services have been
activated, the ASSIST button can connect you
directly to the Customer Care call center (if
equipped). You will be directed to one of the
following four services:
Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or
need a tow, you’ll be connected to someone
who can help anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has
e
xpired, for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services, or help
answering any general questions surrounding
your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features, such
as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Featur
es — If Equipped
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and
y
ou will be presented with your ASSIST options on
the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing
the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
v
ehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs that
you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services to you, we may
record and monitor your conversations with
Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care,
whether such conversations are initiated through
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services in
your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device, and
may share information obtained through such
recording and monitoring in accordance with
MULTIMEDIA 211
regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree
and consent to any recording, monitoring or
sharing of information obtained through any such
call recordings.
Send & Go — If Equipped
Description
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a
destin
ation on your mobile device, and then send
the route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
How It Works
1. T
here are multiple ways to find a destination.
After selecting the Location tab at the bottom
of the App, browse through one of the
categories provided, or type the name or
keyword in the search box. You can also
select categories such as “Favorites” or
“Contact List”.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appea
rs. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current location.
Send the destination to the vehicle (Send &
Go).
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through
a noti
fication or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the
location
of your vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to
make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the
Mobile
App and select the Location tab at the
bottom of the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connect
s your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network that is ready to go wherever you are.
After you've made your purchase, turn on your
device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or
any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone
on your private network access the Web — great
for working and relaxing.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
5
212 MULTIMEDIA
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an internet
a
ccess
hotspot in the vehicle, using the
radio as an access point. The hotspot will
allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a
laptop or any other portable-enabled media
device) to wirelessly connect to the internet.
Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month trial
period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial can
be activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscr
iption to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the How To
Purchase button and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to
the A
T&T portal to get set up.
3.
For existing Connected Car customers: Push
the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
Customer Care agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can
change
its name and the password by selecting the
Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi
Hotspot button. You can also view the connected
devices from the app screen by pressing the View
Connected Devices button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required
in orde
r to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
C
u
s
t
o
m
er Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforce
ment as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care
that your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent
will ask for the stolen vehicle report number
(as issued by your local law enforcement). If
you have downloaded the Mobile App, you can
push the Settings menu button on your device,
select “Help”, and then select “SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authe
nticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement with
whom you filed the stolen vehicle report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work
with your local law enforcement to locate the
vehicle. You will be contacted by law
enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While
the investigation is ongoing, you should also
contact your insurance company to inform it of
the situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat
-
ible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
availa
ble everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You
have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications in this vehicle when it
is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in
an accident involving in serious injury or death.
MULTIMEDIA 213
Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
If Equipped
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
s
e
r
v
i
c
e through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will be
sent to you every month so you can stay on top of
your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is provided
as a convenience to you and does not substitute
for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report,
the Uconnect system in your vehicle may
collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM
Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your vehicle’s
health and performance, your vehicle’s location,
your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and
other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when
you enr
oll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue
even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription unless you call SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care and tell them to deactivate your
Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
p
rivat
e policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/
privacy-policy.
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses
a
p
r
ob
l
em with one of your vehicle’s key systems.
For further information, go to your Owner’s
website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register
and ac
tivate services. During this process you will
be asked to provide an email address to which the
reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind
you whe
n services are needed, or to alert you of
other important information, such as recall
notices. When you receive a notification through
your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the
message, or press Call Care to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen
will d
ismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle
Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you
can reopen messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Naviga
tion, you can send a destination directly to
your vehicle using Alexa.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa
for hel
p, or complete a list of commands by saying:
“Alexa, ask <brand name> for help with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask
Alexa:
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code .”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for
SiriusXM Guardian™
Ú page 203.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to
Amazon
Alexa:
5
214 MULTIMEDIA
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. S
earch for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
E
n
a
b
l
e.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand
> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials.
This will be the same user name and password
you used when registering for SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. There will be
additional settings to confirm on the following
screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the
<vehicle brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill
on Alexa!
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
keep tabs on your car. Google Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™ phones,
iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers, like
Google Home. If you need assistance, ask Google
for help, or for a complete list of commands by
saying: “Hey Google, ask <brand name> for help
with my car.”
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant
app on your smart phone from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant
app w
ith your Gmail ID. Verify your account by
pressing the icon in the upper right-hand
corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand
name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
accoun
t. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
and password you created when you activated
SiriusXM Guardian™. There will be additional
settings to confirm on the following screen.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
linki
ng process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote
start
Send a destination to your vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire pressure, fuel
level and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and
give y
ou peace of mind when your loved ones are
out on the road. You can set boundary limits,
monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s
location any time, any place. Use the Mobile App to
set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle
is dri
ven either out of or into a geographic
boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being
driven
outside of the curfew time.
MULTIMEDIA 215
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceed
s a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is
driven
outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet
drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Mobile App right
on your
Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Mobile App from the App
Store®
or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using
the username and password you created when
you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connec
ted through Bluetooth®.
4. The Mobile App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch,
you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering your
security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level,
vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and
more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel
for Sma
rtWatch Integration.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turnin
g in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™
Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
ASSIST button (if equipped) and then select
SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle
touchscreen to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your
call will be directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent
or held in a queue until an agent is available. If you
do not have an active subscription, push the
ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS —
I
F EQUIPPED
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror or overhead console?
You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS
Call button to cancel the call. To cancel the
call, either push the SOS Call button again, or
press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the
SOS C
all button from my vehicle? Certain
vehicle information, such as make and model,
is transmitted along with the last known GPS
location.
3.
When could I use the SOS Call button? You can
use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or
someone else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it can
take up to three minutes or more for the
request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
quickly, however its range is limited and your
Mobile App comes in handy for these and
other situations.
5
216 MULTIMEDIA
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile devices,
which is why security measures have been
engineered into the Mobile App. Asking for
your username, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN are required for the
activation of Remote services through your
mobile device. It is your responsibility to
protect your passwords and PINs.
4.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? T
he Mobile App is compatible with most
devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these
devices allow us to remotely command your
vehicle. Other operating systems may be
supported in the future.
5.
Why is the Mobile App running slow? The
M
obile App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G (data), or
5G (data) network connection. If either your
device or your vehicle is in an area with below
average coverage, it may take longer to log in
and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2.
I
f I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
d
oe
s
i
t cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes,
once you enter your vehicle, and start the
engine, the pop-up message stating that you
have a new route will appear. There is an exit
button on the pop-up that will cancel the route
if selected.
3.
Can I select a different route than the most
recen
t one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you
enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the
pop-up message offers a “Locations” option.
Once “Locations” is selected, you can choose
from a list of recently sent destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is your
responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly.
See the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™
terms of service for more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or more
for the request to get through to your vehicle.
3.
How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the
horn and lights by pushing the red Panic
button.
MULTIMEDIA 217
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To enhance
your privacy, and the privacy of others using
your vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is
required for you to activate this service. You
must involve local law enforcement to have
SiriusXM Guardian™ locate your vehicle. We
may also locate the vehicle for other law
enforcement or government agencies,
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the
service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that
you have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After
you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
your vehicle is recovered, you will be contacted
by law enforcement.
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance
rates
? Some insurance providers offer lower
rates on vehicles equipped with systems that
can deter auto theft. When shopping for
insurance, be sure to inform the insurance
provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services subscription to find out if the insurance
provider can offer you a lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
compani
es, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle and
yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will remote start your vehicle
more quickly. However its range is limited. For
example, when you are leaving the stadium
after the game, you can use the Mobile App to
remote start your vehicle and have the inside
of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get
to it.
3.
Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
devic
e? People sometimes lose their wireless
devices, which is why security measures have
been engineered into the Mobile App. Asking
for your username, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN help to ensure that
nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to
find your device.
4.
Can someone drive off with my vehicle using
the A
pp? No. Driving your vehicle still requires
the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start
feature simply starts the engine to warm up or
cool down the interior before you arrive.
5.
Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the c
ancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the
vehicle.
6.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? T
he Mobile App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely
command your vehicle. Other operating
systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or more
for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
5
218 MULTIMEDIA
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the
horn and lights by pressing the red Panic
button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will
continue for a maximum of three minutes.
4.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
App? The Mobile App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely
command your vehicle. Other operating
systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
account? There are three ways that you can
register your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed
to an agent who can assist in registering
your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Select the button to speak with an
agent, who can assist in registering your
new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen
and then follow the prompts from the
provided email. You will receive an email
with an activation link that will be good for
72 hours. Once you click the activation link,
you will be prompted to fill out your informa
-
tion and accept Terms and Conditions.
Then,
you will be directed to the SiriusXM
Guardian™ home page to complete your
profile and demo the remote services.
2.
Why do I need an email address? Without an
email address, customers cannot register for
SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers need to
register so they can subscribe to receive
additional services and create a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN for remote command
requests.
3.
How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security
PIN? S
et up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN during the registration process. The
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN will be
required to authenticate you when accessing
your account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4.
What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
secur
ity PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting
Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5.
How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payme
nt account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can be
updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in your
vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
6.
How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated online
on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your Owner’s
Site then select Edit Profile to edit your
personal information. Make your edits and
click Save.
7.
Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for certain
Apps and services.
MULTIMEDIA 219
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9.
What happens when my subscription comes
up for
renewal? If you have added a credit card
to your account information, your subscription
will be automatically renewed for a term length
in accordance with the service plan that you
have selected at the then current subscription
rate and on every renewal date thereafter,
unless you cancel your subscription by calling
SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If you have not
added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter in
advance of your expiration date to remind you
that your subscription is ending soon.
10.
How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notifi
cation preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11.
How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror or overhead console.
12.
How do I update my credit card information?
Login t
o your Owner’s Site, and select Edit
Profile, then select SiriusXM Guardian™
Payment Account.
13.
How do I find out how much longer I have on
my su
bscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a
subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter of notifi-
cation.
14.
Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided
from the date of cancellation for annual plans
or longer. Please see the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for
refunds related to billing plans of other lengths
and other circumstances.
15.
Can I cancel a subscription before it expires?
Yes.
If you have an annual subscription, your
subscription will be canceled the day you
cancel. If you have a monthly subscription,
your subscription will be canceled on the last
day of the month in which you choose to
cancel.
16.
What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before
your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all personal
information, returns the Uconnect system to
its original factory settings, removes all
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services and
account information. To remove your account
information from the Uconnect system,
contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
17.
What if I forgot to remove my account
inform
ation before I returned my lease vehicle
or sold it? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
18.
What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection compatible with my device is
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services that
required your smartphone only direct calls to
Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if
you have an operable network.
5
220 MULTIMEDIA
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data
which may include information about your vehicle,
your vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in
your vehicle, and other data. The collection, use
and sharing of this information is required to
provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services and is further described by the Uconnect
Privacy Policy, which can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This
information may be collected by SiriusXM®
C
onnect
ed Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with
FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
diagnostic information including location data may
be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscr
iption, this vehicle diagnostic health
information, including location data, may still be
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the Connected Services including
Sirius
XM Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent
to the collection, use and disclosure of this
information in accordance with the Uconnect
Privacy Policy. If you do not want this information to
be collected, used, or shared, you must cancel your
Uconnect services in their entirety by contacting us
as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
r
adio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8
in
(20 cm
) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio
Ú page 349.
221
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system
detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
charac
teristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipm
ent Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer
-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual
-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro
-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
6
222 SAFETY
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start
Assist (HSA) and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steeri
ng Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC)
and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST uses the integration of the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system with the electric power
steering to increase the safety level of the whole
vehicle. In critical situations (understeering,
oversteering, braking with different grip
conditions), through the DST function the ESC
system controls the steering to implement an
additional torque contribution on the steering
wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver to
the driver. The coordinated action of brakes and
steering increases the safety and feeling of vehicle
control.
NOTE:
The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replac
e the driver’s actions while driving the car.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift,
it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that
wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers, and it will only
intervene during these types of maneuvers. It
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such
as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking
objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode. F
or a complete explanation of the available
ESC modes, see
Ú page 223.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
SAFETY 223
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions, and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent
all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that
involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent accidents resulting from
loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci
-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicl
e must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may nega
-
tively affect the performance of the ESC system.
Change
s to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improp
-
erly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
d
egrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifi-
cation or poor vehicle maintenance that
r
educes the effectiveness of the ESC system
can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
6
224 SAFETY
ESC Operation Modes
To disable ESC and other safety systems, follow
the instructions below.
There are three modes of active safety systems
present on the vehicle:
ESC On
Partial Off
Full Off
ESC On – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And
Four-Wh
eel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when
operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the
normal mode for operating a four-wheel drive
vehicle in 2WD or 4WD High. The ESC system will
be in “ESC On” mode whenever the vehicle is
started or the power transfer unit (if equipped) is
shifted out of 4WD Low. This mode should be used
for most driving situations. ESC should only be
turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” for specific
reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” and to “Full
Off” for additional information.
NOTE:
It is recommended to select the mode "Partial Off"
or "Ful
l Off" only for specific reasons.
Partial Off – Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in
deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the
threshold for TCS and ESC activation, which allows
for more wheel spin than what ESC normally
allows.
ESC OFF Button
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ES
C OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will turn off. This will restore the
normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow ch
ains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pushing the ESC
OFF button. Once the situation requiring “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This may
be done while the vehicle is in motion.
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High
And 4WD Low
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and
off-road use when ESC stability features could
inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail
conditions. The ESC OFF button is located in the
lower switch bank above the climate control panel.
To enter “Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC
OFF button for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate
and an “ESC OFF” message will appear in the
odometer.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for
the “l
imited slip” feature described in the TCS
section) until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40
mph
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
descri
bed in the TCS section, has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
SAFETY 225
(64 km/h). At speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the
system automatically switches to “Partial Off” mode,
described above. When the vehicle speed returns to
less than 35
mph (56 km/h), the ESC system will
return
to “Full Off” mode. The ESC OFF Indicator
Light is always illuminated when ESC is off. To turn
ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode
of operation.
NOTE:
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stabil
ity offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
e
ngage to assist in maintaining stability. “Full Off”
mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road
use.
NOTE:
“Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in
4WD Low. The ESC system will be in this mode
whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD Low or
the power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD Low.
The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime
will sound when the gear selector is moved from
any position to the PARK (P) position and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur
even if the message was cleared previously.
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the
a
ctivation of some driving modes provide partial
off or full off of some active safety systems in order
to optimize performance in specific modes.
Partial or full off of the active safety systems will be
indica
ted by a light in the instrument cluster.
In "SAND" and "MUD", the active safety systems
are partially disabled and put in place to ensure
maximum performance in the specific mode of
operation. However, you can reactivate them
completely at any time by pushing the ESC button.
NOTE:
In 4WD Low, the active safety systems are
complet
ely bypassed in order to ensure maximum
off-road performance.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when
the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles/kilometers at speeds greater
than 30
mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon
as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(locate
d in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as
soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when Traction Control
System is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration,
ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned
off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in
“
Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
The ESC OFF button is located in the center
console.
6
226 SAFETY
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. O
ff (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
f
ollowi
ng conditions must also be met to enable
HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
The driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically
i
f driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude
(greater than approximately 8%). The set speed for
HDC is selectable by the driver and can be
adjusted using brake and throttle input.
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation with
t
hrottle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the
following conditions occur:
The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h) but
remains below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is on
level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK (P).
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
f
ollowing conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The driver’s door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph
(40
km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC swi
tch has an LED, which offers feedback to
the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
and remain solid when HDC is enabled or acti-
vated. This is the normal operating condition for
HD
C.
The switch lamp will flash for several seconds
then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC
switch when enable conditions have not been
met.
The HDC Switch is located within the Selec-Terrain
knob in the upper right position.
SAFETY 227
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to help the driver accelerate the
vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If
the driver releases the brake while stopped on an
incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not
apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle
will roll down the hill as normal. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to amount of
throttle applied.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to a
ctivate:
The vehicle must be stopped.
The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate)
grade or greater hill.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
For vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission, the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and
all for
ward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, see
Ú page 64.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and
engine power is reduced to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly
to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) are in the “Partial Off” mode or the “Full Off”
modes. For further information, see
Ú page 223.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
The system may reduce engine power and apply
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract
the sway of the trailer.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use ca
ution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. For
further information, see
Ú page 124. When TSC is
functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light will flash, the engine power may be
r
educe
d and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer
from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
6
228 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar-based sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane w
idth on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m).
The zon
e length starts at the outside mirror and
extends approximately 20
ft (6 m) beyond the rear
fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6
mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is neces-
sary to deactivate the BSM system manually
t
h
r
ou
g
h
the settings menu to avoid a misdetec-
tion. For further information, see Ú page 133.
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the
r
adar
sensors are located must remain free of
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the radar sensors located on the rear fascia/
bumper with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
Rear Sensor Locations
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detect
ion zones by illuminating the BSM warning
light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume
Ú page 231.
BSM Warning Light
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
SAFETY 229
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
e
ither side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 31
mph (50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
s
peed
of less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the
vehicl
e remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15
mph (25 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
6
230 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes
Ú page 349.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides
of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 1
mph (2 km/h), to objects
moving
a maximum of approximately 22 mph
(35
km/
h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
SAFETY 231
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked
by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
s
ystem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
m
ode, t
he BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert, the radio (if
on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM sy
stem, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be a
relate
d message on instrument cluster display. If
BSM system is off, this message will be visualized
every time the vehicle is restarted.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode wh
en the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Blinded Sensor
In the case of a sensor that is blinded:
BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on contin-
uously
An instrument cluster dedicated message will
display
NOTE:
The rear fascia/bumper must be clean and free of
any obs
tructing debris.
System Not Available
In the case of the system being temporarily
unavai
lable:
BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on contin-
uously
An instrument cluster dedicated message will
display
In the case of the system being completely
unavailable:
A chime will sound
An instrument cluster dedicated message will
display
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
232 SAFETY
NOTE:
Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized
dealer
for service.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION OPERATION —
I
F EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings (through the radio), visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display),
and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when
it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings
and limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate
the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn
-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn
-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the dr
iver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: Afte
r the
end of the intervention of automatic braking, the
engine could stall, unless the driver can press the
clutch pedal.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the
end of the intervention of automatic braking, the
transmission may remain in last gear stored:
therefore the vehicle could lurch forward, once the
brakes release a few seconds later. If the Forward
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle
at standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 2
6 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide
the ma
ximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicl
e in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3
mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec
-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
SAFETY 233
If the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the FCW system
will be automatically deactivated.
The active braking is disabled when a trailer is
connected with a Mopar® Trailer Towing
system. If the vehicle is equipped with an after
-
market system, it is recommended that the
Active
Braking is turned off manually
Ú page 349.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
the Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Warning + Active
Brakin
g,” this allows the system to warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
and enable the active braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Only warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the
audible and visual warnings.
Changing the status of the system can be done at
any time in the vehicle's head unit.
NOTE:
When the system is turned off, the FCW system
state
will reset.
Changing FCW Sensitivity
By changing the settings on the menu of the
Uconnect system, you can change the sensitivity of
the system by choosing one of the following three
options: "Near", "Medium" or "Far"
Ú page 133.
The default option is "Medium". This setting allows
t
he system to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front when it is at a standard
distance, intermediate between the “Near” and
“Far” settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to "Far", the
system
will warn the driver of a possible accident
with the vehicle in front when the latter is at a
greater distance, giving you the chance to act on
the brakes in a more limited and gradual way. This
setting gives the driver the maximum possible time
of reaction to prevent a possible accident.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
FCW pos
sible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the option to "Near", the system will
warn the driver of a possible accident with the
vehicle ahead of it when the latter is a reduced
distance. This setting offers a reaction time to the
driver lower than the settings "Medium" and "Far",
in the case of a potential accident, providing a
more dynamic driving of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW pos
sible collision warnings experienced.
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is
maintained in memory when the engine is
switched off.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW
Limited Functionality” or “FCW Limited
Functionality Wipe Front Windshield” momentarily,
there may be a condition that limits FCW
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer
present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
6
234 SAFETY
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads: “FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, this indicates there is an internal
system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
“FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
Warnin
g
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This most
often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will read “FCW Front Radar Sensor
Temporarily Blocked” and the system will
deactivate.
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked
” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels
with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The system
will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path, this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. In absence of visible
obstructions on the fasica/bumper, it could be
necessary to wipe off the radar directly on the
surface, after having the radar cover removed. It’s
recommended that an authorized dealer perform
this operation.
NOTE:
If the “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow or front-end protector is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit FCW operation.
Use only a soft cloth for cleaning. Do not use
solvents or abrasive pastes.
The radar is equipped with a defrost system, so
in some climatic conditions it could reach high
temperatures. Wait at least 30 seconds after
the engine has been turned off before touching
the sensor.
Precautions While Driving With FCW
In certain driving conditions, such as:
Driving in the vicinity of a curve
Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
Lane changing of other vehicles
Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
The intervention of the system could be
u
n
e
x
p
e
cted or delayed. The driver must therefore
always pay particular attention, while maintaining
control of the vehicle to drive in complete safety.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could
detect
the presence of a vehicle that is in front of
the vehicle, but that does not preside in the same
lane. In cases such as this, the system might
respond.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
SAFETY 235
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of
vehicl
es that are in front of the vehicle but placed
outside the field of action of the radar sensor and
could therefore not react in the presence of small
vehicles such as bicycles or motorcycles.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lanes, or stay in the
traffi
c lane of their vehicle while moving into the
field of action of the radar sensor, may cause the
intervention of the system.
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle
t
hat c
rossed the range of the radar sensor in an
oncoming intersection.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approxi
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile
(1.6
km
) after a three hour period. The cold tire
i
n
f
l
a
t
ion pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 322 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
i
f the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
6
236 SAFETY
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to
turn off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressu
re Monitoring System Light will turn off once
the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light will
still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be i
ncreased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert
(TFA) system.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi
-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicl
e’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu
-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not
reached the level to trigger illumination
of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect TPMS
information on your instrument cluster
Ú page 349.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS
sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket
wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance. Customers are encour
-
aged to use OEM wheels to ensure TPMS feature
o
peration.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an after
-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you
take y
our vehicle to an authorized dealer to have
your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
SAFETY 237
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressu
re in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluste
r, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
message will display in the instrument
cluster, an "Inflate to XX" message will be displayed
and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in
one or more of the four active road tires. Should
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your
vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the
system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be i
ncreased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the
TPMS to receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition is
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Light will turn off when the fault
condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching
Full S
ize Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full
size spare tire does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full
size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a
chime will sound and the TPMS Light and “LOW
TIRE PRESSURE” and "Inflate to XX" messages
will turn on upon the next ignition cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Light will
flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will
sound and the TPMS Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and r
einstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare or non-matching full size spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the
“TPMS Light” will turn off, as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
6
238 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Operation
TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel
as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressu
re in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Light will illuminate in the instrument
c
l
u
s
t
e
r and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for a
minimum of five seconds and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument cluster
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to
XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return
to their original color, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be i
ncreased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20
minu
tes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
t
h
e
T
P
MS to receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system
f
ault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat
, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Light will no longer flash, and
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
SAFETY 239
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire
assem
bly has a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensor that can be monitored by the
TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound
and the TPMS Light will turn on upon the next
ignition key cycle. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a Tire Low message, an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing
the low tire pressure value in a different color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minu
tes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS Light” will
turn of
f, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires.
4. The instrument cluster will display a graphic
showing the tire pressure value in the same
color as the other pressure values in place of
the different color low tire pressure value. The
instrument cluster will also display a dedicated
message to remind you to service the flat tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching
Full S
ize Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full
size does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not
monitor the pressure in the compact spare
tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full
size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS
Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster
will still display a different color pressure value
and an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Light will
flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the instrument cluster will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and r
einstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare or non-matching full size, the
TPMS will update automatically. In addition,
the TPMS Light will turn off and the graphic in
the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel
and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS
sensors, such as when installing Winter wheel and
tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the
TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20
minutes above 15 mph
(24
km/
h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Light
w
i
l
l
f
lash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on and the instrument cluster will display
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPMS and
6
240 SAFETY
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in
the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire a
ssemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will c
hime, the TPMS Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off, and the instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message. The instrument cluster will also display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will no longer be displayed as long as no
system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section
may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehic
le seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position
Ú page 255.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-
facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint
Ú page 255.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behin
d them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
should
er belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be mov
ed back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehic
le has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modifi
ed to accommodate a disabled person,
see
Ú page 346 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
SAFETY 241
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they c
an reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is fir
st in the START or ON/RUN position a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled when
the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn solid
red and remain red until the seat belt is buckled.
After the driver and outboard front seat passenger
have buckled their seat belts all Seat Belt
Reminder Lights will turn off. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. The
cluster display will inform the driver that you must
fasten the driver’s seat belt in order to release the
parking brake.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
t
he ve
hicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain solid red until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on
vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
unbuck
les their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin
until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authori
zed dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Remind
er Light will turn on and remain on until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
6
242 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte
-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri
-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sur
e the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
SAFETY 243
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low ac
ross your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju
-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear t
he seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi
-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt s
ystem. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho
-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facili
ty for inspection.
WARNING!
6
244 SAFETY
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clear
s the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
p
refer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipp
ed with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
SAFETY 245
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt p
lacement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restra
int Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position. For more
information, see
Ú page 262.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear
a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click.”
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automat
ically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
6
246 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2
. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow i
t to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts
of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
SAFETY 247
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If
the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN
p
osition.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
relate
d gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
S
u
p
p
l
e
mental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 69.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
6
248 SAFETY
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during
an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects
whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front p
assenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could c
ause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort
-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel
or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
WARNING!
SAFETY 249
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detect
s a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passen
ger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
S
e
a
t
-
M
ounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
6
250 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label
Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows
. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
c
ertai
n side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisi
ons, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restra
int system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after
-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof ra
cks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
v
ehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
SAFETY 251
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
design
ed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complet
e ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the in
ternal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo
-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
c
ol
l
i
s
i
ons. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu
-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
s
it upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
6
252 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
t
he ai
r bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu
-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme
-
diately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deploye
d. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy
-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15
minutes
f
r
om
t
h
e intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of thes
e other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an autho
-
rized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
SAFETY 253
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the ST
OP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active,
a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn
the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and
right turn signal lights, located in the instrument
panel, may both be blinking and will continue to
blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of
the road, you must follow the system reset
procedure.
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds.
Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
6
254 SAFETY
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to
be successful.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
N
eutra
l State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed
w
ithin one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds.
Customer Will See
SAFETY 255
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
u
n
d
e
r
s
tanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-tri
vial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi
-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, a
nd crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipm
ent is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo
-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
6
256 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call
1-888-327-4236.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have n
ot reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
c
hild restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
ou
tgrown
the height or weight limit of their booster
seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicl
e
SAFETY 257
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward
-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac
-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
i
nfant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
6
258 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back
of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
I
f the answer to any of these questions was “no”,
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
O
nly
Sea
t Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
R
estra
int
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
R
estra
int
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
R
estra
int
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
SAFETY 259
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of
the ch
ild and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat
belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
s
ystem
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat
owner’s manual for more information.
6
260 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
c
u
s
h
i
on
where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location - Rear Outboard Seats
Passenger Side (Example Shown)
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner
LATCH low
er anchorages from the outboard seating positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH an
chorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restra
ints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages
in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passen
ger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if
t
he ch
ild restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
SAFETY 261
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located
on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipp
ed with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 262 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. L
oosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the
tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 264 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. T
ighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1
inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. For
typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 261.
6
262 SAFETY
(Continued)
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are eq
uipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 245 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
s
ection
s for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac
-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
i
nfant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
WARNING!
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 263
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
posit
ion. If the second row seat can be reclined,
you may recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retra
ctor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locke
d, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is
not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while
you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child
Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a
forward
facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight
limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint
is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against
the be
lt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
6
264 SAFETY
tighten the tether strap. For directions to attach
a tether anchor, see
Ú
page 264.
9. T
est that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1
inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
t
he belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. If the seat can be moved,
you may need to move the seat forward to
provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage
for that seating position, move the child
restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direc
t path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restr
aint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the c
hild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See
Ú
page 259 for the location
of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
SAFETY 265
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipp
ed) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 78.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have q
uestions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when t
he ignition switch is first placed in
the ON/RUN mode. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 240.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
l
ikely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
6
266 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT in
stall your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
i
n
s
t
a
l
ling any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
e
ngine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter
-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
s
ecure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING!
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
SAFETY 267
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaus
t system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows
are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas,
which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed
area, such as a garage, and never sit in a
parked vehicle with the engine running for an
extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an
open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
6
268
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on
the switch bank below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashe
rs. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a
safety hazard warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assist
ance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in OFF mode.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may we
ar down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an SOS
and AS
SIST button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 349.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a
built in function. Other Uconnect services will
only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™
service is active and you are connected to an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
(Continued)
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect
you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance (if equipped) – If you get a
flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST
button and you’ll be connected to someone who
can help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (if
equipped) – In-vehicle support for SiriusXM
Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care (if equipped) – Total
support for all other vehicle issues.
UConnect Care (if equipped) – Total support for
all the UConnect feature.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
conso
le.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there
will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the overhead console or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
overhead console.
2. The LED lights located within the SOS and
ASSIS
T buttons on the overhead console will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. The SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a
SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
S
OS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur
-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system
will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper
-
ator terminates the connection.
5. T
he SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
7
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT
have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
NOTE:
The SOS Call function may not be available for the
first
minute after the vehicle is started
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console lights located within the
SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after
-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI
-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVIC
ES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the overhead console light is illuminated, have
an authorized dealer service the SOS Call
system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
(Continued)
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
tion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the
party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
c
an immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. A
pply the Electric Park Brake.
4
.
P
l
a
ce the gear selector into PARK (P)
(autom
atic transmission) or REVERSE (R)
(manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
7
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the driver’s front tire,
block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the ve
hicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
If equipped, the jack and tools are located under
the load floor in the rear storage compartment.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handl
e.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench and
chocks
.
Jack And Tools Location
4. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
Spare Tire Fastener Removal
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
(Continued)
5. Remove the spare tire.
Jack And Tools
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt
wrench.
2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap
covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt
wrench to pry the center cap off carefully
before raising the vehicle.
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Chocks
5 — Screwdriver
6 — Emergency Allen Key
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake and place an auto-
matic transmission in PARK.
Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
7
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel
bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the
wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the jacking location
that
is closest to the flat tire. Jacking location
is indicated by a stamped arrow on the body.
Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage
the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange, centering the jack saddle inside the
cutout in the sill cladding.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are cr
itical. See below images for proper jacking
locations.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat
tire.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. M
ount the spare tire.
M
o
u
n
t
ing Spare Tire
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
compact spare tire or a limited — use spare
tire
Ú page 333.
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of
the w
heel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten
the wheel bolts.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down
on the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts
in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been
tightened twice
Ú page 341. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with
a torqu
e wrench by an authorized dealer or at
a service station.
11. After 25 mile
s (40 km) check the wheel bolt
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
wheel bolts are properly seated against the
wheel.
12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and flat
tire.
Properly Stowed Tire
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
7
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage
compartment inside a storage container. Located
inside the container are a screwdriver and the
emergency fuel funnel. To access the Tire Service
Kit open the liftgate and remove the load floor.
Tire Service Kit Location
TIRE SERVICE KIT COMPONENTS AND
O
PERATION
Tire Service Kit Components
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first
emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit located
in the rear storage compartment inside the storage
container.
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle,
take
it out from the bag and place it near the
punctured tire. Screw the clear flexible filling
tube to the tire valve.
2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle power
outlet socket. Start the vehicle engine.
3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the
“I” position. The electric compressor will be
turned on, sealant and air will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should
be rea
ched within 20 minutes. If the pressure
has not been reached turn off and remove the
Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet
(10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute
the sealant inside the tire.
4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the
compressor directly to the tire valve and
repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached,
start
driving the vehicle to uniformly distribute
the sealant inside the tire. After 10 minutes,
stop and check the tire pressure. If the pres-
sure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, and con-
tact the nearest authorized dealer.
1 — Power Button
2 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Warning Label
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
5 — Power Plug (Located On Bottom Side Of Tire
Service Kit)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
(Continued)
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above
repeat the inflation process to reach the cor
-
rect tire pressure and continue driving.
5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle and
place
it on the dashboard as a reminder to the
driver that the tire has been treated with Tire
Service Kit.
TIRE SERVICE KIT USAGE PRECAUTIONS
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50
mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repair
ed or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen
-
gers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita
-
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there
is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal
-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
w
ater and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
7
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REPLACING THE SEALANT
NOTE:
Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration
date a
t an authorized dealer.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the ma
nufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
assembly.
NOTE:
The positive
(+) bat
tery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to
the positive
(+) battery post.
Positive (+) Battery Post
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the
autom
atic transmission into PARK (P)
(manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and place
the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compart-
ment, away from sources of heat. Failure to fol-
low this WARNING may result in sealant canister
r
upture and serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is fro-
zen. It could rupture or explode and cause per-
sonal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cable’s reach, set the parking brake and make
sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) en
d of the jumper
cable to the positive
(+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jum
per cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) en
d of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jum
per cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
Suitable Engine Ground
5. S
tart the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster
battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The
resu
lting electrical spark could cause the battery
to explode and could result in personal injury.
7
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
en
d of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jum
per cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) en
d of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jum
per cable from the positive
(+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery, and
reinstall the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
Ú page 272 for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
g
as can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler
neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with
the funnel to avoid spills.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from
opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door using the inside release
button. Do not pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
f
unnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the f
uel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors op
en.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating your engine by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase engine idle
speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impend
ing overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
A depleted battery will prevent the Electric Park
Brake
to be applied.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc
-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehi
-
cle with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H” and you hear contin
-
uous chimes, turn the engine off immediately
and ca
ll for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or cool
-
ant bottle is hot.
7
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Carefully separate the gear selector boot
assembly from the bezel.
Gear Selector Bezel Location
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal
.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down
into the gear selector override access hole (at
the right front corner of the gear selector
assembly), and push and hold the override
release lever down.
Gear Selector Override Location
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
positi
on.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. R
einstall the gear selector boot on the bezel.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. For
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or
SECOND (2) gear and REVERSE (R) (with manual
transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
a
chieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less.
Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stabil
ity Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 223.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
button
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
(Continued)
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
preven
t damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total elec-
trical failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB)
is eng
aged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to
raise the rear wheels off the ground when
moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to
avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engage
-
ment. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or
disabl
ed via the customer programmable
features in the Uconnect Settings.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrost
ers, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions
on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK
(P) in order to move the vehicle
Ú page 281.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30
mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec-
onds con
tinuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE,
do not spin the wheels faster than 15
mph
(24
km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin
the wheels above 30
mph (48 km/h) while in
gear (
no transmission shifting occurring).
Towing
Condition
Wheels
Off Th
e
Ground
Front-
Wheel
D
rive
(FWD)
Four-
Wheel
Drive
(4WD)
Flat Tow NONE
NOT
ALLOWED
NO
T
ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR
NOT
ALLOWED
NO
T
ALLOWED
FRONT OK
NOT
ALLOWED
On
Trailer ALL
BEST
METHOD
OK
CAUTION!
7
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FRONT–WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels
OFF the ground on a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle
must towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground
(using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with
the front wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and re
mains released, while being towed.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle
raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the
front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be located
on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of
the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
Front Tow Hook Locations
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or power
transfer unit will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
Rear Tow Hook Location
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
opening the door. During towing remember that
not having the aid of the power brakes and the
electromechanical power steering, greater force is
needed in applying the brakes and steering of the
vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 252.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle
Ú page 255.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
7
286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500
miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
interv
als exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
1 year or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever
c
omes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle
time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under
these
conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
unusual wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as
needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
MAINTENANCE PLAN
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
8
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace the Uconnect box (telematics
box) battery (if equipped).
1
• • •
Check tire condition/wear and adjust
pressu
re, if necessary, check Tire
Service Kit expiration date (if
equipped).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check operation of lighting system
(headl
amps, direction indicators,
hazard warning lights, luggage
compartment, passenger
compartment, glove compartment,
instrument panel warning lights, etc.).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid
l
evels
(brakes/hydraulic clutch,
windshield washer, engine coolant,
etc.).
2
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check engine control system operation
(via d
iagnostic tool).
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Visually inspect condition of: exterior
bodywork, underbody protection, pipes
and hoses (exhaust - fuel system -
brakes), rubber elements (boots,
sleeves, bushings, etc.).
• • • • • • • •
Check windshield/rear window wiper
blade position/wear.
• • • • • • • •
Check operation of windshield washer
s
ystem
and adjust jets if necessary.
• • • • • • • •
Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate
l
ocks a
nd cleanliness and lubrication
of linkages.
• • • • • • •
Visually check the condition and wear
of
the front and rear brakes.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Check the front suspension, tie rods,
C
V/Uni
versal joints and replace if
necessary.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Visually inspect the condition of the
a
ccessory drive belt.
3
• • •
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
8
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check the tension of the accessory
drive belt.
• •
Inspect and replace, if required, front
e
nd ac
cessory drive belt, tensioner,
and, idler pulley.
3
• •
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necess
ary.
•
Change engine oil and replace oil
f
ilter
.
4
5
6
Inspect the PTU fluid level. • • •
Inspect the rear differential fluid level. • • •
Replace spark plugs (1.3L Turbo
Engine).
7
• • •
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
8
• • • • • • •
Replace brake fluid every two years.
9
• • • • • • •
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
○ Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
• •
1. The Uconnect box (telematics box) battery replacement has to be done every five years, regardless of mileage.
2. Always only use the fluids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.
3. The maximum mileage is 75,000 miles
(120,000 km). The belt must be replaced every six years, regardless of distance traveled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions (dusty
areas, cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum mileage is 37,500 miles (60,000 km). The belt must be replaced every four years regardless of the mileage.
4. The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one year or
10,00
0 miles (16,000 km).
5. Always only use the fluids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.
6. If
the engine oil quality detected by the vehicle diagnostics is lower than 20%, it is advisable to replace the engine oil and engine filter in order to avoid another service operation
after
a short time.
7. The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:
Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are especially certified for such engines Ú page 345.
Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the “Maintenance Schedule” for spark plug replacement.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.
8. The
engine air cleaner filter should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.
9. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
8
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.3L TURBO ENGINE
1 — Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Located Under Engine Cover) 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Battery
8
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Engine Oil Cap/Dipstick Installation — 1.3L Turbo
Engine
Install the oil cap/dipstick aligning arrow on the
cap with arrow on the engine cover.
Oil Cap
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markin
gs on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment, and the fluid level should
be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not engine
coolant/ antifreeze)
Ú page 293.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
1 — Oil Cap/Dipstick Arrow
2 — Engine Cover Arrow
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 279.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do
not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
h
a
n
d
s
after handling.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
system
s may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For engine oil selection Ú page 345.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for rep
lacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 287.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
conside
rably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
NOTE:
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi
-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants
are flammable and can explode, injuring you.
Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can
cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to the Warranty Information Book for
further warranty information.
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi
-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants
are flammable and can explode, injuring you.
Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can
cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrig
-
erant or any repair requiring lines to be discon-
nected should be done by an experienced
t
echnician.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG com
pressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Cleaner
See an authorized dealer for service.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geogr
aphical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat
-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these
conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be
placed in a position that allows the wiper blades to
be easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers
must b
e in the Park position before placing the
ignition in the STOP/OFF position.
Service mode must be activated within two
minute
s after the ignition is placed in the STOP/
OFF position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service
Position
command (antipanic) must be active for at
least half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position
command
, the wiper blades are activated for
250
ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated
severa
l times to bring the blades into the desired
position, up to a maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is
disabl
ed.
8
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN position.
Number of subsequent activations is three.
Two minutes timer has expired after turning the
ignition OFF.
NOTE:
When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go
into th
e parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the
wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
Front Wiper Blade
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the
wiper
blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to
raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the
wiper blade end while pushing the wiper blade
towards the liftgate glass to unsnap the blade
pivot pin from the wiper blade holder on the
wiper arm.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper
blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and
firmly push the wiper blade until it snaps into
place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system
; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon
-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid b
reathing CO
Ú page 267.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
c
ontact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
system
s can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfun
ctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage
:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnos
tic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper
-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather,
where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for
any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation
of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting in
possible damage to the converter and vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi
-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
c
ontrolled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
WARNING!
8
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properl
y. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contain
s visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 287.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 345.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat
-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introdu
ced into the cooling system in an emer
-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho
-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
c
oolant is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organi
c Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufac
-
turer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
-34°F (-37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if
equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any
accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested
by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the
level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should
be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on
the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper
level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
c
oming
from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows n
o evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro
-
sion protection of your engine which contains
alumin
um components.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
8
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
O
ther designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically
Ú page 287.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services, or
immediately if the Brake Warning Light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to
bring the fluid level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level
can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The
brake fluid level should be checked when the pads
are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
Ú page 345.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding
the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in
an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid
Ú page 345. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in an open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake
fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in
loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the
transmission.
WARNING!
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
only exception to this policy is the use of special
dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use the manufacturer specified transmission
fluid
Ú page 345. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
r
ecommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
u
sed.
FUSES
General Information
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder
Ú page 345.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire and/
or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
8
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Access To The Fuses
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located
in the engine compartment, under the instrument
panel and on the inside of the left side cargo trim
panel.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, gearbox system) or
steering system blows, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left side of the engine compartment.
Engine Compartment Fuse Location
8
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Fuse Panel & Cover Location
Proceed as follows:
Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
Slowly release the screw.
Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide
completely from top to bottom.
Fully depress the screw, using the special
screwdriver supplied.
Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
Release the screw.
1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Unit
F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply Body Computer
F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics Module
F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted Steering
F06 70 Amp Tan – – Engine Cooling Fan
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission, GSM
F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – – 5 Amp Tan Supply Secondary Loads
F14 – – 15 Amp Blue WCAC Pump/Active Grille Shutters
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump
F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission
F17 – – 30 Amp Green Supply Primary Loads
F18 – – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner 1.3L Compressor
F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive
F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – – 10 Amp Red Power Control Module Engine
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield *
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
F82 – 20 Amp Yellow – Power Control Module Engine
F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan
F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors
F89 – 30 Amp Green – Heated Rear Window
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the steering column at the bottom of the instrument panel.
For the fuse replacement see an authorized dealer.
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front Seats/Fan Air Conditioning
F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side)
F36 15 Amp Blue
Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear Ceiling Lights (With Sunroof),
E-Call, SGW
F37 10 Amp Red
System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC, Brake Pedal
Switch
(NC)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
F42 7.5 Amp Brown
Power Under Lock and Key, Brake Control Electronics Module, Electric Power-Assisted
Steeri
ng
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door from
the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
Rear Fuse Access Door
The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse
holder
No. 1 and fuse holder No. 2 (if equipped
with trailer towing) are located closest to the rear
of the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
Supply ParkSense, SGW, Mirror, Heated Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC System, S&S
Inhibition Command, Blind Spot, Rain/Light Sensor, Humidity Sensor
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Air Conditioning, Lane Departure Warning, Terrain Selector, Trailer Tow Module, Compass
Module,
Rear View Camera
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
8
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuse Holder No. 1
Fuse Holder No. 2
On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse for the sun visor of the retractable roof.
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 30 Amp Blue Power Inverter
F2 20 Amp Yellow HIFI Audio System
F3 20 Amp Yellow MY SKY
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat (Driver Side)
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side)
F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Information
Before you replace a bulb, check the contacts to
be sure they are not oxidized.
Replace the bulbs with the same type and
wattage.
After replacing a light bulb, always check the
correct orientation.
Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning,
check that the fuse is intact.
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditi
ons. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to
change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will
usually accelerate the clearing process.
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this
section includes bulb description and replacement
part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb
replac
ement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps (LED Version) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps H13
8
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)/Front Turn Indicator PSY24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps (If Equipped With LED Headlamps) PSY24W
Front Fog Lamps H11
Front Fog Lamps (LED Versions) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) WY5W
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators (LED Versions) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Reverse W16W
License Plate Lamp W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
See the following steps to replace:
1. O
pen the engine compartment and remove
the hea
dlamp bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counter-
clockw
ise then pull outwards.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
3. P
ush on the locking tab on the headlamp bulb
connec
tor and remove the bulb and socket.
Headlamp Bulb
Headlamp Bulb
4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it
is properly locked.
5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it
clockwise making sure it is properly locked.
LED Headlamps – If Equipped
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
During bulb replacement do not touch the new
glass bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination
will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes
in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only
with the engine off. Also make sure that the
engine is cold, to avoid the danger of burns.
8
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Fog
Lights
See the following steps to replace:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use
a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Posit
ion Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access
3. Remove the electrical connector.
4. Rel
easing the two tabs, and remove the bulb
and b
ulb socket from the housing.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light Assembly
5. Install the new bulb and socket into the
housin
g, and engage the two tabs, making
sure that it is properly locked.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Rei
nstall the access door.
Front
Fog Lights
See the following steps to replace:
1. T
urn the front wheels completely.
2. Use
a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Posit
ion Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab
remove
the electrical connector.
Fog Light Assembly
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
1 — Bulb Socket
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then
replace the bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure
the bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. R
einstall the access door.
LE
D
F
r
ont Fog Lamps – If Equipped
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Front Side Indicators
See the following steps to replace:
1. O
perating from inside the engine
compa
rtment using a suitable tool release
the retaining clip.
2. Remove lamp assembly by sliding it toward the
outsid
e.
Lamp Assembly
3. Remove the electrical connector by pushing
the t
ab then disconnect the electrical
connector.
4. Rotate counterclockwise to release the bulb
socket
from the lamp assembly, and remove it.
Bulb Socket
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
Bulb
6.
Insert the new bulb in the socket.
7. Reinstall the bulb and socket into the lamp
assem
bly by turning it clockwise, making sure
it is locked into place.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. R
ein
stall the lamp assembly on the car,
m
a
k
i
n
g sure it is locked into place.
8
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors – (If
Equipped)
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear
view m
irror.
Mirror Cap
Removing the mirror cap
2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as
shown.
T
ransparent Lens
3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the
transparent lens assembly by rotating the
socket counterclockwise.
Transparent Lens Assembly
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by
pulling the bulb straight out.
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is
locked into place.
6. Reinstall the socket in to the transparent lens
assembly.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view
mirror, making sure it is locked into place.
CAUTION!
The procedure is described as a guideline. For
the replacement of the lamp it is recommended
that you contact an authorized dealer.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
Rear Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
Position Lights
Stop Lights
Direction Indicator
REVERSE Lights
See the following steps to replace:
1. O
pen the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the door as
shown.
T
rim Panel Door
3. Using a suitable tool remove fastener.
4. Dis
connect the electrical connector by pushing
the r
elease.
Rear Lamp Fastener and Electrical Connector
5. Remove the rear tail lamp, sliding it toward the
outside as shown.
Tail Lamp Removal
6. Unscrew the screws and remove the rear tail
lamp holder.
Rear Lamp Assembly
1 — Electrical Connector
2 — Fastener
1 — Mounting Screws
8
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
7. Replace the bulb as necessary.
Rear Tail Lamp Holder
8. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly
locked.
9. Reassemble the lamp assembly on the rear
tail lamp housing, tightening the screws.
10. Reposition the rear tail lamp on the car.
11. Secure the fastener of the rear tail lamp and
reconn
ect the electrical connector.
12. Reinstall the door making sure it locked into
place.
13. Finally close the liftgate.
LED Rear Tail Lamps – If Equipped
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Reverse Lights – If Equipped With LED Tail Lamps
See the following steps to replace:
1. U
se a suitable tool to remove the screws and
remove
the access door.
Reverse Light Access
2. B
y pushing the electrical connector tab
remove the electrical connector.
Reverse Light Assembly
3. R
otate the bulb counterclockwise, and then
r
e
p
l
a
ce the bulb.
4. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure
the bulb is locked into place.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access door.
Cente
r High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL is LED. For replacement see an
a
uthorized dealer.
1 — Tail Light
2 — Reverse Bulb
3 — Position Light/Stop Light/Turn Signal
1 — Screw
2 — Screw
3 — Access Door
1 — Bulb
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
License Plate Lights
See the following steps to replace:
1. U
sing a suitable tool remove the license plate
lens.
License Plate Light Location
License Plate Light
2. R
emove the bulbs from the individual side
contacts.
3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are
properly locked between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
NOTE:
If removing the license plate lens using a screw-
driver, be sure to cover the tip of the screwdriver
w
ith a
cloth so no damage is done to the lenses or
the vehicle paint.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
See below steps to replace:
1. U
sing a suitable tool remove the front
courtesy light as shown.
Front Courtesy Light Housing
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as
shown.
F
ront Courtesy Bulb Housing
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of
bulb
housing.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
8
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy
light
housing making sure that they are
properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure that
it is properly locked.
Dome Light Vanity Mirror
See below steps to replace:
1. L
ift the cover of the mirror and pull out the
visor m
irror light cover.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side
contacts, and then insert the new bulb, making
sure that it is properly locked between the
contacts.
Visor
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making
sure
that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the
mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
See below steps to replace:
1. O
pen the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly,
pull
the bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly
locked
.
Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
See below steps to replace:
1. U
sing a suitable tool release the lamp
assem
bly at both the ends.
2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
Rear Dome Light Housing
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the
contac
ts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
1 — Bulb
2 — Flap
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
Dome Light — MY SKY
See below steps to replace:
1. L
ower the handle in the direction shown
remove the dome light.
Retractable Roof Light
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side
contac
ts.
Bulb
3. I
nsert the new bulb, locking it between the
c
on
t
a
c
ts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the luggage compartment and remove
the do
me light assembly.
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.
Light Cover
3. Close the light cover over the bulb.
4. R
einstall the dome light in its correct position.
WARNING!
Before proceeding with the replacement of
the lamp wait for the exhaust pipes are cool:
DANGER OF BURNS!
Modifications or repair of the electrical system
performed incorrectly and without taking into
account the technical characteristics can
cause malfunctions with the risk of fire.
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in
the event of breakage be careful of the projec
-
tion of fragments of glass.
Halogen lamps must be handled by touching
only the metallic part. If the transparent bulb
is in contact with the fingers, reduces the
intensity of the emitted light and you can also
affect the life of the lamp. In case of acci
-
dental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth damp-
ened with alcohol and allow to dry.
8
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
s
t
a
n
d
a
rd have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"
P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“
S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
8
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
EXAMPLE:
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Tire Terminology And Definitions
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of thre
e hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
origina
l equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the dr
iver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the sp
are tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
t
he:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. T
ire size designed for your vehicle.
4
.
C
ol
d
tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and s
pare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire
size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the
Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú
page 123.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Axle W
eight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
and tr
ailer towing Ú page 123.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
availa
ble amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggag
e and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu
-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
a
nd may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
8
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resist
ance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
a
bnorma
l wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
8
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide r
ange of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
K
eep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and th
e outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will
be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it mee
ts the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
a
nd additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50
miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
r
a
p
i
d
loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a colli
-
sion. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four.
Never
combine them with other types of tires.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicl
e on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Run Flat mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
for more
information
Ú page 235.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30
mph
(
4
8
k
m
/
h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continu
ously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 282.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6
mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
For further information Ú page 332.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
d
e
v
e
l
op
across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
instal
ling new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
8
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú page 331. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicl
e Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more
informa
tion relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
Ú page 323.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rea
r tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer
or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre
-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspen
sion components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over
-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
h
ave a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipm
ent tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what w
as originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75
mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120
km
/h) refer to original equipment or an
a
u
t
h
or
i
zed tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid a
nd traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a sp
are tire, please refer to Tire Service Kit for
further information
Ú page 276.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
design
ated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 127.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
e
quipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
8
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tempo-
rary emergency use only. With these spares, do
not dri
ve more than 50
mph (80 km/h). Tempo-
rary use spares have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extend
ed period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss C
lear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the snow traction
device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum
projec
tion beyond tire profile or
equivalent)
ALL Front 215/65R16 7 mm Cable Chain
8
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 287.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
b
e corr
ected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation
method is the “forward cross” shown in the
following diagram. This rotation pattern does not
apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
The suggested Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire
rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in
the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
componen
ts, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30
mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the power transfer
unit. Tire rotation schedule should be followed to
balance tire wear.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri
-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage
when the system is started again.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven for
at lea
st 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure
is required to start the vehicle
Ú page 80.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
theref
ore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and re
ducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec
-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or luke
warm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the be
lts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that w
ill scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of pain
t and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plasti
c, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show a
ny foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
341
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is stamped on a plate located on the left
front corner of the instrument panel cover, which is
visible from outside the car through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeat
ed brake applications with the engine OFF)
the brakes will still function. However, the effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should
be torqued using a properly calibrated torque
wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Wheel Bolt
Torque
**Wheel Bolt
Size
Wheel Bolt
Socket Size
89 Ft-Lb
(120
N·
m)
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
9
342 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine
failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard s
tarting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
1.3L TURBO ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, and provide
s
a
t
i
s
f
actory fuel economy and
performance, when using high-quality
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating
of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 Method.
The use of a 91 or higher octane premium gasoline
will a
llow these engines to operate to optimal
performance. This increase in performance is most
noticeable in hot weather or other heavier load
conditions, such as towing.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 343
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 USAGE IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15).
Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
sion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion, and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
f
urthe
r aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
s
hould
be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
9
344 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
FLUID CAPACITIES
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some
light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
a
n
d
m
a
y void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1.3L Turbo 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.3L Turbo 4.8 Quarts 4.5 Liters
Cooling System *
1.3L Turbo 8.8 Quarts 8.3 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 345
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,0
00 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meetin
g the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
m
eets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-13340.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-30 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark
Ú page 295.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
is una
vailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0–15% ethanol
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equiva
lent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
We recommend using Mopar® Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
We recommend using Mopar® Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-90
(API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend using Mopar® DOT 4.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years regardless of mileage.
9
346
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer
. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer
’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized
dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may
contact FCA US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 347
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu
-
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar®
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized, endorsed
and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three weeks
of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contrac
t you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/
om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
p
rovisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
348 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicl
e Safety Hotline toll free at (888)
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at (800)
333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complet
e working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
d
iagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
t
he assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 349
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Informa
tion Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
TMB2 and UCONNECT
The following regulatory statement applies to
T
M
B
2
a
nd UConnect devices equipped in this
vehicle:
TBM2 FCC ID : RX2TCUFCA025SN
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
UCONNECT FCC: Y7OVP2RFP
IC: 7812H-VP2RFP
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
a
nd wi
th Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interfe
rence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innov
ation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'
utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
RF Exposure Requirements
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance
r
equir
ements, the device must be installed and
operated to provide a separation distance of at
least 20 cm from all persons.
This equipment complies with Canada radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d
’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies pour
un environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement
doit être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20
cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et
votre corps
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the
party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
350 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
ACC and FCW
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and wi
th Industry Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. this device must not cause interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference,
inclu
ding interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Indu
strie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own expense
RF Radiation Exposure Information
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation
e
xposur
e limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body. This
transmitter must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d'expo
sition aux rayonnements IC établies pour un
environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit
être installé et utilisé avec un minimum de 20 cm
de distance entre la source de rayonnement et
votre corps. Ce transmetteur ne doit pas être place
au même endroit ou utilise simultanément avec un
autre transmetteur ou antenne.
BSM
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and wi
th Industry Canada's RSS - 310 . Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful
interfe
rence, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Cet appareil est conforme au RSS - 310 d 'Industrie
Canada
. Le fonctionnement est soumis à la
condition que cet appareil ne provoque pas
d'interférences nuisibles et accepte toute
interférence, y compris les interférences
susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement
indésirable de l'appareil
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
b
y the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
351
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.........................................341
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............300
Adding Fuel....................................................122
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................294
Additives, Fuel ...............................................343
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................172
Air Bag ...........................................................247
Advance Front Air Bag...............................247
Air Bag Operation ......................................248
Air Bag Warning Light................................246
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................249
Enhanced Accident Response......... 252, 285
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................285
Front Air Bag .............................................247
If Deployment Occurs................................252
Knee Impact Bolsters................................249
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............255
Maintenance .............................................255
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............247
Side Air Bags .............................................249
Transporting Pets......................................265
Air Bag Light ..................................70, 246, 265
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) .............................................................296
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................296
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 296, 297
Air Conditioning............................................. 297
Air Conditioning Filter..............................48, 297
Air Conditioning System................................ 296
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................47
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 329
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................................20
Disarm The System .....................................21
Security Alarm ......................................20, 72
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................10
Android Auto ........................................ 174, 176
Android Auto™
S
....................................... 174
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 300, 344
Disposal ................................................... 301
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 221
Anti-Lock Warning Light ............................72, 76
Apple CarPlay....................................... 174, 178
Apple CarPlay®
S
...................................... 176
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 227
Audio Settings............................................... 160
Audio Systems (Radio).................................. 133
Auto Down Power Windows .............................53
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................53
Automatic Headlights.......................................38
Automatic High Beams.....................................37
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............47
Automatic Transmission......................... 85, 303
Adding Fluid..................................... 303, 345
Autostick......................................................87
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 303
Fluid Change............................................. 303
Fluid Level Check...................................... 303
Fluid Type ........................................ 303, 345
Special Additives ...................................... 303
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........50
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................50
Axle Fluid....................................................... 345
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 345
B
Back-Up Camera ........................................... 121
Battery ................................................... 70, 294
Charging System Light.................................70
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................15
Belts, Seat .................................................... 265
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 228
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing................ 168
11
352
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................297
Brake Assist System ......................................222
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................222
Brake Fluid ....................................................345
Brake System ...................................... 302, 341
Anti-Lock (ABS)..........................................341
Fluid Check ...............................................345
Master Cylinder .........................................302
Warning Light .............................................. 70
Brakes ...........................................................302
Brightness, Interior Lights................................ 40
Bulbs, Light....................................................267
C
Camera..........................................................121
Camera, Rear ................................................121
Capacities, Fluid ............................................344
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)................................................293
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................301
Car Washes ...................................................338
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................267
CD..................................................................162
Cellular Phone ...............................................220
Certification Label .........................................123
Changing A Flat Tire.......................................271
Chart, Tire Sizing............................................323
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ............................................................... 78
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................265
Checks, Safety .............................................. 265
Child Restraint .............................................. 255
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 258
Child Seat Installation .............................. 263
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 262
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 257
LATCH Positions ....................................... 259
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 260
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.. 259
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 257
Seating Positions...................................... 258
Child Safety Locks ...........................................25
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 342
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 334
Climate Control ................................................44
Clutch ........................................................... 302
Fluid ......................................................... 302
Coin Holder......................................................49
Cold Weather Operation ..................................81
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 333
Connected Services ...................................... 202
Connected Services FAQ............................... 215
Connected Services Features ....................... 205
Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 203
Connected Services, Introduction ................. 202
Connector
UCI...............................................................50
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).............50
Console............................................................49
Floor ............................................................49
Contract, Service........................................... 347
Controls ........................................................ 151
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 301
Cooling System ............................................. 299
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 300
Coolant Level...................................299, 301
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 344
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 301
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 300
Inspection................................................. 301
Points To Remember ................................ 301
Pressure Cap ............................................ 301
Radiator Cap............................................. 301
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze).........................300, 344, 345
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 338
Cruise Control (Speed Control).........................95
Cruise Light...............................................76, 77
Customer Assistance .................................... 346
Customer Programmable Features ............... 134
Cybersecurity ................................................ 133
D
Daytime Running Lights ...................................37
Dealer Service............................................... 295
Defroster, Rear Window ...................................43
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 265
De-Icer, Remote Start ......................................20
353
Deleting A Phone ...........................................168
Dimmer Switch
Headlight..................................................... 37
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)................................................294
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................283
Disc Drive ......................................................162
Disconnecting................................................168
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).......................301
Disturb...........................................................171
Door Ajar.......................................................... 71
Door Ajar Light................................................. 71
Door Locks ...................................................... 24
Drag & Drop...................................................149
Driver Memory Presets ..................................160
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .............................. 26, 27
Driving ...........................................................130
E
Electric Brake Control System .......................222
Anti-Lock Brake System.............................221
Electric Park Brake .......................................... 82
Electric Parking Brake ..................................... 82
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)......... 50
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ....................222
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)........ 95
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................223
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 71
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ......................280
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 268
Jacking ..................................................... 271
Jump Starting ........................................... 278
Overheating.............................................. 281
Tow Hooks................................................ 284
Towing ...................................................... 283
Emission Control System Maintenance ...........78
Engine........................................................... 293
Air Cleaner................................................ 296
Break-In Recommendations........................82
Checking Oil Level .................................... 294
Compartment ........................................... 293
Coolant (Antifreeze).................................. 345
Cooling ..................................................... 299
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 267
Fails To Start ...............................................80
Flooded, Starting .........................................80
Fuel Requirements ................................... 342
Jump Starting ........................................... 278
Oil ...........................................295, 344, 345
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 293
Oil Filter .................................................... 296
Oil Selection .................................... 295, 344
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 295
Overheating.............................................. 281
Starting........................................................80
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 252, 285
Ethanol ......................................................... 342
Exhaust Gas Cautions................................... 267
Exhaust System ................................... 267, 298
Exterior Lighting ...............................................36
Exterior Lights ........................................ 36, 267
F
Family Alerts ................................................. 214
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 296
Air Conditioning ...........................................48
Engine Oil ........................................ 296, 345
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 296
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................................ 268
Turn Signals................................ 39, 76, 267
Flash-To-Pass...................................................37
Flat Tire Changing ......................................... 271
Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 273
Flooded Engine Starting...................................80
Floor Console ...................................................49
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 344
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 267
Fluid Level Checks
Engine Oil ................................................. 294
Fluid, Brake................................................... 345
Fog Lights ........................................................38
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................26
Forward Collision Warning ................... 228, 232
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................. 282
11
354
Fuel ...............................................................342
Adding .......................................................122
Additives ...................................................343
Clean Air....................................................342
Ethanol......................................................342
Gasoline ....................................................342
Gauge.......................................................... 73
Materials Added........................................343
Methanol...................................................342
Octane Rating ................................. 342, 345
Requirements ...........................................342
Specifications............................................345
Fuses.............................................................303
G
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................342
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................342
Gasoline, Reformulated.................................342
Gauges
Fuel ............................................................. 73
Gear Selector Override ..................................281
Glass Cleaning...............................................340
Gross Axle Weight Rating...............................124
GVWR ............................................................123
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................268
Head Restraints............................................... 31
Head Rests...................................................... 31
Headlights
Automatic ....................................................38
Automatic High Beam..................................37
Cleaning ................................................... 338
Delay ...........................................................38
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........37
Lights On Reminder.....................................38
Passing........................................................37
Switch..........................................................36
Time Delay...................................................38
Heated Mirrors.................................................36
Heated Seats...................................................30
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ..............................................................37
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 226
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 226
Hill Start Assist.............................................. 227
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 125
Holder, Coin .....................................................49
Hood Prop........................................................56
Hood Release ..................................................56
I
Ignition.............................................................17
Switch..........................................................17
Inside Rearview Mirror............................34, 268
Instrument Cluster .............................62, 65, 76
Descriptions.................................................76
Display Controls...........................................64
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................65
Menu Items .................................................66
Instrument Cluster Display...............................64
Trip ..............................................................69
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 340
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 339
Interior Lights...................................................39
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................41
Inverter
Power...........................................................51
J
Jack Location ................................................ 272
Jack Operation .....................................271, 273
Jacking And Tire Changing ............................ 271
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 273
Jump Starting................................................ 278
K
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm .............................................20
Disarm The Alarm ........................................21
Keyless Entry ...............................................22
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............16
Remote Keyless Entry..................................14
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................15
355
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) ............................................................... 16
Keyless Enter-N-Go.......................................... 22
Enter The Trunk........................................... 22
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ............................ 22
Passive Entry............................................... 22
Passive Entry Programming......................... 22
Remote Control ........................................... 22
Unlock From The Driver’s Side .................... 22
Unlock From The Passenger’s Side............. 22
Keyless Entry................................................... 14
Keys................................................................. 14
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals........................ 39
LaneSense ....................................................117
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................241
Latches..........................................................267
Lead Free Gasoline........................................342
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................267
Life Of Tires ...................................................331
Liftgate ..................................................... 57, 58
Closing ........................................................ 58
Opening....................................................... 57
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ....................... 43
Light Bulbs.....................................................267
Lights.............................................................267
Air Bag.......................................70, 246, 265
Automatic Headlights.................................. 38
Automatic High Beam.................................. 37
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 225
Brake Warning.............................................70
Cruise ...................................................76, 77
Daytime Running.........................................37
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...........................37
Exterior ..................................................... 267
Fog ..............................................................38
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 268
Headlight Switch..........................................36
Headlights ...................................................36
Headlights On Reminder .............................38
High Beam...................................................37
High Beam/Low Beam Select......................37
Hill Descent Control Indicator................... 226
Instrument Cluster.......................................36
Intensity Control ..........................................40
Interior.........................................................39
Lights On Reminder.....................................38
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)..........73
Park.............................................................76
Passing........................................................37
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................72
Security Alarm .............................................72
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS).............. 235
Traction Control........................................ 225
Turn Signals ................................39, 76, 267
Vanity Mirror................................................34
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .....................................71, 76
Loading Vehicle............................................. 123
Tires.......................................................... 326
Locks
Child Protection ...........................................25
Power Door ..................................................22
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 235
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 297
Lug Nuts........................................................ 341
Luggage Carrier................................................61
M
Maintenance....................................................56
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 294
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 286
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine)......................................................73, 78
Manual
Service...................................................... 348
Master Cylinder
Brakes ...................................................... 302
Media Mode.................................................. 162
Methanol....................................................... 342
Mirrors
Heated.........................................................36
Outside ........................................................35
Rearview............................................ 34, 268
Vanity...........................................................34
Mobile App.................................................... 203
11
356
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ........................................................ 10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................235
Mopar Parts...................................................348
N
Navigation
Before Route Guidance.............................190
Map Updates.............................................200
View Map...................................................191
View Map — Main Menu ............................191
View Map — Settings .................................192
View Map — Settings — Guidance..............196
View Map — Settings — Map Setup ...........193
Where To?.................................................180
Where To? — City Center ...........................189
Where To? — Go Home..............................188
Where To? — Main Menu...........................180
Where To? — Phone ..................................189
Where To? — Point of Interest ...................185
Where To? — Point on Map........................187
Where To? — Trips.....................................187
Navigation Mode ...........................................180
Navigation, Emergency ..................................200
Navigation, Information Menu .......................199
New Vehicle Break-In Period............................ 82
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 240
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 342, 345
Oil Change Indicator ........................................65
Reset...........................................................65
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 296
Oil Filter, Selection........................................ 296
Oil Pressure Light......................................71, 72
Oil, Engine............................................ 295, 345
Capacity.................................................... 344
Checking................................................... 294
Dipstick .................................................... 294
Disposal ................................................... 296
Filter ................................................ 296, 345
Filter Disposal........................................... 296
Identification Logo.................................... 295
Materials Added To .................................. 296
Pressure Warning Light ........................71, 72
Recommendation............................ 295, 344
Synthetic .................................................. 295
Viscosity ................................................... 344
Onboard Diagnostic System.............................77
Operating Navigation .................................... 180
Operating Precautions .....................................77
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual........................................ 348
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................35
Overheating, Engine...................................... 281
P
Paint Care ..................................................... 338
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
S
..................................................... 166
Parking Brake ..................................................82
ParkSense
Front And Rear.......................................... 105
ParkSense Active Park Assist........................ 111
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................ 149
Pets............................................................... 265
Phone Mode.................................................. 164
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 326
Point of Interest
All Points of Interest.................................. 186
Restaurants.............................................. 186
Spell Name ............................................... 186
Power
Brakes ...................................................... 341
Door Locks...................................................22
Inverter ........................................................51
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet).................50
Sunroof........................................................54
Windows ......................................................52
Power Seats
Recline.........................................................29
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 245
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 271
Presets.......................................................... 160
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 245
357
R
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................330
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............301
Radio
Presets......................................................160
Radio Controls...............................................151
Radio Mode ...................................................151
Radio Operation .................................. 151, 220
Radio Remote Controls..................................150
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 42
Rear Camera .................................................121
Rear Cross Path.............................................230
Rear ParkSense System ................................105
Rear Window Defroster ................................... 43
Rear Wiper/Washer......................................... 43
Rearview Mirror ............................................... 34
Reclining Front Seats ...................................... 27
Recreational Towing ......................................129
Reformulated Gasoline..................................342
Refrigerant ....................................................297
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ......................203
Reminder, Lights On........................................ 38
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................241
Remote Control
Starting System........................................... 18
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock .. 208, 215
Remote Features, Horn And Lights................210
Remote Features, Starting .................. 209, 217
Remote Keyless Entry......................................14
Arm The Alarm.............................................20
Disarm The Alarm........................................21
Keyless Enter-N-Go......................................22
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control......... 150
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features..................................................19
Uconnect Settings .......................................19
Remote Starting System ..................................18
Replacement Tires........................................ 332
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 348
Restraints, Child ........................................... 255
Restraints, Head..............................................31
Roadside Assistance............................ 210, 216
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 9
Roof Type Carrier .............................................61
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 336
S
Safety ........................................................... 149
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 265
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 267
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 348
Safety Features............................................. 149
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 322
Safety Tips .................................................... 265
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 267
Satellite Radio............................................... 155
Saved Radio Stations.................................... 160
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 286
Seat Belt Reminder..........................................72
Seat Belts ............................................ 241, 265
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 244
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ............................................ 244
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 245
Child Restraints ........................................ 255
Energy Management Feature ................... 245
Front Seat........................................241, 243
Inspection................................................. 265
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 243
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 244
Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 241
Operating Instructions .............................. 243
Pregnant Women...................................... 245
Pretensioners ........................................... 245
Rear Seat.................................................. 241
Reminder.................................................. 241
Seat Belt Pretensioner.............................. 245
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 241
Untwisting Procedure................................ 244
Seat Belts Maintenance................................ 339
11
358
Seats ............................................................... 26
Adjustment........................................... 26, 27
Head Restraints .......................................... 31
Heated ........................................................ 30
Rear Folding................................................ 26
Reclining ..................................................... 27
Seatback Release ....................................... 27
Tilting ................................................... 26, 27
Security Alarm .......................................... 20, 72
Arm The System .......................................... 20
Disarm The System ..................................... 21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)...................345
Send & Go ........................................... 211, 216
Service Assistance.........................................346
Service Contract ............................................347
Service Manuals............................................348
Settings, Audio ..............................................160
Shift Lever Override.......................................281
Shoulder Belts...............................................241
Side View Mirror Adjustment ........................... 35
Signals, Turn....................................39, 76, 267
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................155
Favorites ...................................................158
Replay .......................................................156
SiriusXM Traffic .........................................201
SiriusXM Travel Link..................................201
Traffic & Weather ......................................158
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ......................................... 158
Favorites................................................... 158
Replay ...................................................... 156
Traffic and Weather.................................. 158
Smart Watch................................................. 215
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 335
Snow Tires .................................................... 333
SOS Call............................................... 205, 215
Spare Tires .......................................... 333, 334
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ......................................... 345
Oil ............................................................. 345
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........................95
Starting ............................................................80
Button .........................................................17
Cold Weather...............................................81
Engine Fails To Start....................................80
Remote........................................................18
Starting And Operating.....................................80
Starting Procedures.........................................80
Steering
Tilt Column ..................................................26
Wheel, Heated.............................................26
Wheel, Tilt....................................................26
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 150
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 150
Stolen Vehicle Assistance ....................212, 217
Storage, Vehicle ...............................................47
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 160
Stuck, Freeing............................................... 282
Sun Roof ...................................................54, 56
Opening .......................................................55
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 247
Sway Control, Trailer ............................ 124, 227
Symbol Glossary...............................................10
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 295
System, Remote Starting .................................18
T
Telescoping Steering Column...........................26
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............47
Tilt Steering Column.........................................26
Time Delay
Headlight .....................................................38
Tip Start ...........................................................80
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 326
Tire Markings ................................................ 322
Tire Safety Information.................................. 322
Tire Service Kit.............................................. 276
359
Tires...................................267, 329, 333, 337
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................331
Air Pressure...............................................329
Chains .......................................................335
Changing ...................................................271
Compact Spare .........................................333
General Information ........................ 329, 333
High Speed................................................330
Inflation Pressure......................................329
Jacking ......................................................271
Life Of Tires ...............................................331
Load Capacity............................................326
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..74, 235
Quality Grading..........................................337
Radial........................................................330
Replacement.............................................332
Rotation ....................................................336
Safety.............................................. 322, 329
Sizes..........................................................323
Snow Tires.................................................333
Spare Tires...................................... 333, 334
Spinning ....................................................331
Trailer Towing............................................127
Tread Wear Indicators...............................331
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................126
Tow Hooks
Emergency ................................................284
Towing .......................................................... 124
Disabled Vehicle....................................... 283
Guide........................................................ 126
Recreational ............................................. 129
Weight ...................................................... 126
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)............................. 227
Trailer Towing ............................................... 124
Hitches ..................................................... 125
Minimum Requirements........................... 126
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 126
Wiring ....................................................... 128
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 126
Trailer Weight................................................ 126
Transmission
Automatic ...........................................85, 303
Fluid ......................................................... 345
Transporting Pets.......................................... 265
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 331
Turn Signals..............................................39, 76
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features ................................. 170
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone................................... 172
Uconnect Settings ..............................19, 134
Uconnect Phone...................................166, 168
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................... 171
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress................ 171
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 174
Call Continuation ...................................... 172
Call Controls ............................................. 170
Call Termination ....................................... 172
Cancel Command ..................................... 166
Connecting To A Particular Mobile P
hone Or Audio Device After Pairing....... 168
Help Command......................................... 166
Join Calls .................................................. 172
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite ................................................ 169
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress........................................ 172
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 169
Natural Speech......................................... 166
Operation.................................................. 165
Overview ................................................... 164
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone................................................... 166
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device .................................................. 168
11
360
Phonebook Download ...............................169
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............171
Power-Up...................................................174
Recent Calls ..............................................170
Redial........................................................172
To Remove A Favorite ...............................169
Toggling Between Calls .............................172
Touch-Tone Number Entry.........................170
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..172
Voice Command ........................................172
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features..................................19, 24, 134
Passive Entry Programming................24, 142
Uconnect System...........................................147
Uniform Tire Quality Grades...........................337
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector........................................................50
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................342
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................244
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................34
Vehicle Finder...................................... 211, 216
Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 213
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 213
Vehicle Loading ................................... 123, 326
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 295
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations....................10
Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 213
Vehicle Storage................................................47
Voice Command............................ 33, 176, 178
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................33
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard............................. 268
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)....................................................76
Warnings And Cautions....................................69
Warnings, Roll Over ........................................... 9
Warranty Information .................................... 347
Washer
Adding Fluid.............................................. 294
Washing Vehicle............................................ 338
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care........................... 334
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 334
Wi-Fi .............................................................. 211
Wind Buffeting .................................................54
Window Fogging...............................................47
Windows
Power...........................................................52
Windshield Defroster .................................... 265
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 297
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 297
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................41
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................42
Wrecker Towing............................................. 283
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
First Edition V1
22_BV_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
